dc971754d7d65154081123d3543f083faa77f5c6
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
4 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7 @c in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/obj-*.c
10 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11 @c %**start of header
12 @setfilename as.info
13 @c ---config---
14 @macro gcctabopt{body}
15 @code{\body\}
16 @end macro
17 @c defaults, config file may override:
18 @set have-stabs
19 @c ---
20 @c man begin NAME
21 @c ---
22 @include asconfig.texi
23 @include bfdver.texi
24 @c ---
25 @c man end
26 @c ---
27 @c common OR combinations of conditions
28 @ifset COFF
29 @set COFF-ELF
30 @end ifset
31 @ifset ELF
32 @set COFF-ELF
33 @end ifset
34 @ifset AOUT
35 @set aout-bout
36 @end ifset
37 @ifset ARM/Thumb
38 @set ARM
39 @end ifset
40 @ifset Blackfin
41 @set Blackfin
42 @end ifset
43 @ifset BOUT
44 @set aout-bout
45 @end ifset
46 @ifset H8/300
47 @set H8
48 @end ifset
49 @ifset SH
50 @set H8
51 @end ifset
52 @ifset HPPA
53 @set abnormal-separator
54 @end ifset
55 @c ------------
56 @ifset GENERIC
57 @settitle Using @value{AS}
58 @end ifset
59 @ifclear GENERIC
60 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
61 @end ifclear
62 @setchapternewpage odd
63 @c %**end of header
64
65 @c @smallbook
66 @c @set SMALL
67 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
68 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
69 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
70 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
71 @c
72 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
73 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
74 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
75 @c break.
76 @c
77 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
78 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
79 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
80 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
81 @c discretion, of course.
82 @ifinfo
83 @set SMALL
84 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
85 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
86 @end ifinfo
87
88 @ifnottex
89 @dircategory Software development
90 @direntry
91 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
92 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
93 @end direntry
94 @end ifnottex
95
96 @finalout
97 @syncodeindex ky cp
98
99 @copying
100 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
102 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
103 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
104
105 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
106 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
107 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
108 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
109 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
110 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
111
112 @c man end
113 @end copying
114
115 @titlepage
116 @title Using @value{AS}
117 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
118 @ifclear GENERIC
119 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
120 @end ifclear
121 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
122 @sp 1
123 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
124 @end ifset
125 @sp 1
126 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
127 @sp 1
128 @sp 13
129 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
130 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
131 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
132 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
133 distracting the boss while they got some work
134 done.
135 @sp 3
136 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
137 @page
138 @tex
139 {\parskip=0pt
140 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
141 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
142 }
143 %"boxit" macro for figures:
144 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
145 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
146 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
147 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
148 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
149 @end tex
150
151 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
152 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
153
154 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
155 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
156 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
157 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
158 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
159 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
160
161 @end titlepage
162 @contents
163
164 @ifnottex
165 @node Top
166 @top Using @value{AS}
167
168 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
169 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
170 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
171 @end ifset
172 version @value{VERSION}.
173 @ifclear GENERIC
174 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
175 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
176 @end ifclear
177
178 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
179 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
180 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
181
182 @menu
183 * Overview:: Overview
184 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
185 * Syntax:: Syntax
186 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
187 * Symbols:: Symbols
188 * Expressions:: Expressions
189 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
190 @ifset ELF
191 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
192 @end ifset
193 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
194 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
195 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
196 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
197 * AS Index:: AS Index
198 @end menu
199 @end ifnottex
200
201 @node Overview
202 @chapter Overview
203 @iftex
204 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
205 @ifclear GENERIC
206 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
207 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
208 @end ifclear
209 @end iftex
210
211 @cindex invocation summary
212 @cindex option summary
213 @cindex summary of options
214 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
215 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
216
217 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
218
219 @ignore
220 @c man begin SEEALSO
221 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
222 @c man end
223 @end ignore
224
225 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
226 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
227 @smallexample
228 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
229 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
234 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
235 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
236 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}] [@b{-o}
238 @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}] [@b{--statistics}]
239 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}] [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}]
240 [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}] [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
241 [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
242 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
243 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
244 @c
245 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
246 @c Add an empty line for separation.
247 @ifset AARCH64
248
249 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
250 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
251 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
252 @end ifset
253 @ifset ALPHA
254
255 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
256 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
257 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
258 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
259 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
260 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
261 @end ifset
262 @ifset ARC
263
264 @emph{Target ARC options:}
265 [@b{-marc[5|6|7|8]}]
266 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
267 @end ifset
268 @ifset ARM
269
270 @emph{Target ARM options:}
271 @c Don't document the deprecated options
272 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
273 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
274 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
275 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
276 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
277 [@b{-mthumb}]
278 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
279 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
280 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
281 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
282 @end ifset
283 @ifset Blackfin
284
285 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
286 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
287 [@b{-mfdpic}]
288 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
289 [@b{-mnopic}]
290 @end ifset
291 @ifset CRIS
292
293 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
294 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
295 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
296 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
297 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
298 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
299 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
300 @end ifset
301 @ifset D10V
302
303 @emph{Target D10V options:}
304 [@b{-O}]
305 @end ifset
306 @ifset D30V
307
308 @emph{Target D30V options:}
309 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
310 @end ifset
311 @ifset EPIPHANY
312
313 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
314 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
315 @end ifset
316 @ifset H8
317
318 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
319 [-h-tick-hex]
320 @end ifset
321 @ifset HPPA
322 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
323 @end ifset
324 @ifset I80386
325
326 @emph{Target i386 options:}
327 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
328 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
329 @end ifset
330 @ifset I960
331
332 @emph{Target i960 options:}
333 @c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
334 [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
335 @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
336 [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
337 @end ifset
338 @ifset IA64
339
340 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
341 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
342 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
343 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
344 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
345 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
346 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
347 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
348 @end ifset
349 @ifset IP2K
350
351 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
352 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
353 @end ifset
354 @ifset M32C
355
356 @emph{Target M32C options:}
357 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
358 @end ifset
359 @ifset M32R
360
361 @emph{Target M32R options:}
362 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
363 @b{--W[n]p}]
364 @end ifset
365 @ifset M680X0
366
367 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
368 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
369 @end ifset
370 @ifset M68HC11
371
372 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
373 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
374 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
375 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
376 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
377 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
378 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
379 @end ifset
380 @ifset MCORE
381
382 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
383 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
384 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
385 @end ifset
386 @ifset METAG
387
388 @emph{Target Meta options:}
389 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
390 @end ifset
391 @ifset MICROBLAZE
392 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
393 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
394 @end ifset
395 @ifset MIPS
396
397 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
398 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
399 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
400 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
401 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
402 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
403 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
404 [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
405 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
406 [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
407 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
408 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
409 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
410 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
411 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
412 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
413 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
414 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
415 [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
416 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
417 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
418 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
419 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
420 [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
421 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
422 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
423 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
424 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
425 @end ifset
426 @ifset MMIX
427
428 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
429 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
430 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
431 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
432 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
433 @end ifset
434 @ifset NIOSII
435
436 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
437 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
438 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
439 @end ifset
440 @ifset NDS32
441
442 @emph{Target NDS32 options:}
443 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
444 [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
445 [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}] [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
446 [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
447 [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
448 [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
449 [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
450 [@b{-mb2bb}]
451 @end ifset
452 @ifset PDP11
453
454 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
455 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
456 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
457 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
458 @end ifset
459 @ifset PJ
460
461 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
462 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
463 @end ifset
464 @ifset PPC
465
466 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
467 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
468 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
469 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
470 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
471 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
472 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-ma2}|@b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
473 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
474 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
475 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
476 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
477 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
478 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
479 @end ifset
480 @ifset RX
481
482 @emph{Target RX options:}
483 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
484 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
485 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
486 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
487 [@b{-mpid}]
488 [@b{-mrelax}]
489 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
490 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
491 @end ifset
492 @ifset S390
493
494 @emph{Target s390 options:}
495 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
496 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
497 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
498 @end ifset
499 @ifset SCORE
500
501 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
502 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
503 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
504 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
505 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
506 @end ifset
507 @ifset SPARC
508
509 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
510 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
511 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
512 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}]
513 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}] [@b{-bump}]
514 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
515 @end ifset
516 @ifset TIC54X
517
518 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
519 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
520 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
521 @end ifset
522
523 @ifset TIC6X
524
525 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
526 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
527 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
528 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
529 @end ifset
530 @ifset TILEGX
531
532 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
533 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
534 @end ifset
535 @ifset TILEPRO
536 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
537 @end ifset
538
539 @ifset XTENSA
540
541 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
542 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
543 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
544 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
545 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
546 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
547 @end ifset
548
549 @ifset Z80
550
551 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
552 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
553 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
554 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
555 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
556 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
557 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
558 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
559 @end ifset
560
561 @ifset Z8000
562 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
563 @end ifset
564
565 @c man end
566 @end smallexample
567
568 @c man begin OPTIONS
569
570 @table @gcctabopt
571 @include at-file.texi
572
573 @item -a[cdghlmns]
574 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
575
576 @table @gcctabopt
577 @item -ac
578 omit false conditionals
579
580 @item -ad
581 omit debugging directives
582
583 @item -ag
584 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
585
586 @item -ah
587 include high-level source
588
589 @item -al
590 include assembly
591
592 @item -am
593 include macro expansions
594
595 @item -an
596 omit forms processing
597
598 @item -as
599 include symbols
600
601 @item =file
602 set the name of the listing file
603 @end table
604
605 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
606 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
607 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
608
609 @item --alternate
610 Begin in alternate macro mode.
611 @ifclear man
612 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
613 @end ifclear
614
615 @item --compress-debug-sections
616 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed
617 to begin with @samp{.zdebug}, and the resulting object file may not be
618 compatible with older linkers and object file utilities.
619
620 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
621 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is the default.
622
623 @item -D
624 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
625 other assemblers.
626
627 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
628 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
629 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
630
631 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
632 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
633 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
634 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
635 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
636 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
637
638 @item -f
639 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
640 compiler output).
641
642 @item -g
643 @itemx --gen-debug
644 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
645 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
646 ECOFF or DWARF2.
647
648 @item --gstabs
649 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
650 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
651
652 @item --gstabs+
653 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
654 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
655 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
656 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
657 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
658
659 @item --gdwarf-2
660 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
661 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
662 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
663
664 @item --gdwarf-sections
665 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
666 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
667 corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
668 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
669 @var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text}
670 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
671 suffix.
672
673 @item --size-check=error
674 @itemx --size-check=warning
675 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
676
677 @item --help
678 Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
679
680 @item --target-help
681 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
682
683 @item -I @var{dir}
684 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
685
686 @item -J
687 Don't warn about signed overflow.
688
689 @item -K
690 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
691 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
692 @end ifclear
693 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
694 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
695 @end ifset
696
697 @item -L
698 @itemx --keep-locals
699 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
700 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
701 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
702 @ifclear man
703 @xref{Symbol Names}.
704 @end ifclear
705
706 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
707 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
708 listing to @var{number}.
709
710 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
711 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
712 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
713
714 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
715 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
716 @var{number} bytes.
717
718 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
719 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
720 to @var{number} + 1.
721
722 @item -o @var{objfile}
723 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
724
725 @item -R
726 Fold the data section into the text section.
727
728 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
729 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
730 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
731 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
732 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
733 requirements at the expense of speed.
734
735 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
736 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
737 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
738 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
739
740 @item --statistics
741 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
742 assembly.
743
744 @item --strip-local-absolute
745 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
746
747 @item -v
748 @itemx -version
749 Print the @command{as} version.
750
751 @item --version
752 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
753
754 @item -W
755 @itemx --no-warn
756 Suppress warning messages.
757
758 @item --fatal-warnings
759 Treat warnings as errors.
760
761 @item --warn
762 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
763
764 @item -w
765 Ignored.
766
767 @item -x
768 Ignored.
769
770 @item -Z
771 Generate an object file even after errors.
772
773 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
774 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
775
776 @end table
777 @c man end
778
779 @ifset AARCH64
780
781 @ifclear man
782 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
783 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
784 @end ifclear
785
786 @ifset man
787 @c man begin OPTIONS
788 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
789 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
790 @c man end
791 @c man begin INCLUDE
792 @include c-aarch64.texi
793 @c ended inside the included file
794 @end ifset
795
796 @end ifset
797
798 @ifset ALPHA
799
800 @ifclear man
801 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
802 for an Alpha processor.
803 @end ifclear
804
805 @ifset man
806 @c man begin OPTIONS
807 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
808 processor.
809 @c man end
810 @c man begin INCLUDE
811 @include c-alpha.texi
812 @c ended inside the included file
813 @end ifset
814
815 @end ifset
816
817 @c man begin OPTIONS
818 @ifset ARC
819 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
820 an ARC processor.
821
822 @table @gcctabopt
823 @item -marc[5|6|7|8]
824 This option selects the core processor variant.
825 @item -EB | -EL
826 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
827 @end table
828 @end ifset
829
830 @ifset ARM
831 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
832 processor family.
833
834 @table @gcctabopt
835 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
836 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
837 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
838 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
839 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
840 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
841 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
842 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
843 @item -mthumb
844 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
845 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
846 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
847 @item -EB | -EL
848 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
849 @item -mthumb-interwork
850 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
851 ARM code in mind.
852 @item -mccs
853 Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
854 @item -k
855 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
856 @end table
857 @end ifset
858 @c man end
859
860 @ifset Blackfin
861
862 @ifclear man
863 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
864 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
865 @end ifclear
866
867 @ifset man
868 @c man begin OPTIONS
869 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
870 the Blackfin processor family.
871 @c man end
872 @c man begin INCLUDE
873 @include c-bfin.texi
874 @c ended inside the included file
875 @end ifset
876
877 @end ifset
878
879 @c man begin OPTIONS
880 @ifset CRIS
881 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
882 @end ifset
883
884 @ifset D10V
885 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
886 a D10V processor.
887 @table @gcctabopt
888 @cindex D10V optimization
889 @cindex optimization, D10V
890 @item -O
891 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
892 @end table
893 @end ifset
894
895 @ifset D30V
896 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
897 processor.
898 @table @gcctabopt
899 @cindex D30V optimization
900 @cindex optimization, D30V
901 @item -O
902 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
903
904 @cindex D30V nops
905 @item -n
906 Warn when nops are generated.
907
908 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
909 @item -N
910 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
911 @end table
912 @end ifset
913 @c man end
914
915 @ifset EPIPHANY
916 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
917 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
918
919 @ifclear man
920 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
921 configured for an Epiphany processor.
922 @end ifclear
923
924 @ifset man
925 @c man begin OPTIONS
926 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
927 an Epiphany processor.
928 @c man end
929 @c man begin INCLUDE
930 @include c-epiphany.texi
931 @c ended inside the included file
932 @end ifset
933
934 @end ifset
935
936 @ifset H8300
937
938 @ifclear man
939 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
940 for an H8/300 processor.
941 @end ifclear
942
943 @ifset man
944 @c man begin OPTIONS
945 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
946 processor.
947 @c man end
948 @c man begin INCLUDE
949 @include c-h8300.texi
950 @c ended inside the included file
951 @end ifset
952
953 @end ifset
954
955 @ifset I80386
956
957 @ifclear man
958 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
959 configured for an i386 processor.
960 @end ifclear
961
962 @ifset man
963 @c man begin OPTIONS
964 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
965 an i386 processor.
966 @c man end
967 @c man begin INCLUDE
968 @include c-i386.texi
969 @c ended inside the included file
970 @end ifset
971
972 @end ifset
973
974 @c man begin OPTIONS
975 @ifset I960
976 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
977 Intel 80960 processor.
978
979 @table @gcctabopt
980 @item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
981 Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
982
983 @item -b
984 Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
985
986 @item -no-relax
987 Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
988 error if necessary.
989
990 @end table
991 @end ifset
992
993 @ifset IP2K
994 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
995 Ubicom IP2K series.
996
997 @table @gcctabopt
998
999 @item -mip2022ext
1000 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
1001
1002 @item -mip2022
1003 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
1004 just the basic IP2022 ones.
1005
1006 @end table
1007 @end ifset
1008
1009 @ifset M32C
1010 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1011 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
1012
1013 @table @gcctabopt
1014
1015 @item -m32c
1016 Assemble M32C instructions.
1017
1018 @item -m16c
1019 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1020
1021 @item -relax
1022 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1023
1024 @item -h-tick-hex
1025 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1026
1027 @end table
1028 @end ifset
1029
1030 @ifset M32R
1031 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1032 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1033
1034 @table @gcctabopt
1035
1036 @item --m32rx
1037 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
1038 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1039
1040 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1041 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1042 encountered.
1043
1044 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1045 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1046 encountered.
1047
1048 @end table
1049 @end ifset
1050
1051 @ifset M680X0
1052 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1053 Motorola 68000 series.
1054
1055 @table @gcctabopt
1056
1057 @item -l
1058 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1059
1060 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1061 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1062 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1063 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1064 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1065
1066 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1067 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1068 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1069 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1070 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1071 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1072
1073 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1074 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1075 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1076
1077 @end table
1078 @end ifset
1079
1080 @ifset NIOSII
1081
1082 @ifclear man
1083 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1084 for an Altera Nios II processor.
1085 @end ifclear
1086
1087 @ifset man
1088 @c man begin OPTIONS
1089 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1090 Altera Nios II processor.
1091 @c man end
1092 @c man begin INCLUDE
1093 @include c-nios2.texi
1094 @c ended inside the included file
1095 @end ifset
1096 @end ifset
1097
1098 @ifset PDP11
1099
1100 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1101 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1102
1103 @table @gcctabopt
1104 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1105 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1106 default is @option{-mpic}.
1107
1108 @item -mall
1109 @itemx -mall-extensions
1110 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1111
1112 @item -mno-extensions
1113 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1114
1115 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1116 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1117
1118 @item -m@var{cpu}
1119 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1120 disable all other extensions.
1121
1122 @item -m@var{machine}
1123 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1124 model, and disable all other extensions.
1125 @end table
1126
1127 @end ifset
1128
1129 @ifset PJ
1130 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1131 a picoJava processor.
1132
1133 @table @gcctabopt
1134
1135 @cindex PJ endianness
1136 @cindex endianness, PJ
1137 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1138 @item -mb
1139 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1140
1141 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1142 @item -ml
1143 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1144
1145 @end table
1146 @end ifset
1147
1148 @ifset M68HC11
1149 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1150 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1151
1152 @table @gcctabopt
1153
1154 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1155 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1156 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1157
1158 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1159 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1160 XGATE address space.
1161
1162 @item -mshort
1163 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1164
1165 @item -mlong
1166 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1167
1168 @item -mshort-double
1169 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1170
1171 @item -mlong-double
1172 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1173
1174 @item --force-long-branches
1175 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1176 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1177 sub routine.
1178
1179 @item -S | --short-branches
1180 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1181 when the offset is out of range.
1182
1183 @item --strict-direct-mode
1184 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1185 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1186
1187 @item --print-insn-syntax
1188 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1189
1190 @item --print-opcodes
1191 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1192
1193 @item --generate-example
1194 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1195 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1196
1197 @end table
1198 @end ifset
1199
1200 @ifset SPARC
1201 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1202 for the SPARC architecture:
1203
1204 @table @gcctabopt
1205 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1206 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1207 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1208
1209 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1210 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1211
1212 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1213 UltraSPARC extensions.
1214
1215 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1216 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1217 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1218
1219 @item -bump
1220 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1221 @end table
1222 @end ifset
1223
1224 @ifset TIC54X
1225 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1226 architecture.
1227
1228 @table @gcctabopt
1229 @item -mfar-mode
1230 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1231 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1232 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1233 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1234 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1235 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1236 behaviour in the shell.
1237 @end table
1238 @end ifset
1239
1240 @ifset MIPS
1241 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1242 a MIPS processor.
1243
1244 @table @gcctabopt
1245 @item -G @var{num}
1246 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1247 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1248 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1249
1250 @cindex MIPS endianness
1251 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1252 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1253 @item -EB
1254 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1255
1256 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1257 @item -EL
1258 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1259
1260 @cindex MIPS ISA
1261 @item -mips1
1262 @itemx -mips2
1263 @itemx -mips3
1264 @itemx -mips4
1265 @itemx -mips5
1266 @itemx -mips32
1267 @itemx -mips32r2
1268 @itemx -mips64
1269 @itemx -mips64r2
1270 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1271 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1272 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1273 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1274 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips64}, and
1275 @samp{-mips64r2} correspond to generic MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2,
1276 MIPS64, and MIPS64 Release 2 ISA processors, respectively.
1277
1278 @item -march=@var{cpu}
1279 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1280
1281 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1282 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1283
1284 @item -mfix7000
1285 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1286 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1287 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1288
1289 @item -mfix-rm7000
1290 @itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
1291 Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
1292 followed by a load instruction.
1293
1294 @item -mdebug
1295 @itemx -no-mdebug
1296 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1297 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1298
1299 @item -mpdr
1300 @itemx -mno-pdr
1301 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1302
1303 @item -mgp32
1304 @itemx -mfp32
1305 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1306 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1307 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1308 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1309
1310 @item -mips16
1311 @itemx -no-mips16
1312 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1313 @code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1314 turns off this option.
1315
1316 @item -mmicromips
1317 @itemx -mno-micromips
1318 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1319 @code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-micromips}
1320 turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips}
1321 at the start of the assembly file.
1322
1323 @item -msmartmips
1324 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1325 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1326 equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1327 @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1328
1329 @item -mips3d
1330 @itemx -no-mips3d
1331 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1332 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1333 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1334
1335 @item -mdmx
1336 @itemx -no-mdmx
1337 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1338 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1339 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1340
1341 @item -mdsp
1342 @itemx -mno-dsp
1343 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1344 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1345 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1346
1347 @item -mdspr2
1348 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1349 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1350 This option implies -mdsp.
1351 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1352 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1353
1354 @item -mmsa
1355 @itemx -mno-msa
1356 Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
1357 This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
1358 @samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
1359
1360 @item -mmt
1361 @itemx -mno-mt
1362 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1363 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1364 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1365
1366 @item -mmcu
1367 @itemx -mno-mcu
1368 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1369 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1370 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1371
1372 @item -minsn32
1373 @itemx -mno-insn32
1374 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1375 microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1376 instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1377 the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1378 option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1379 start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1380 selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1381
1382 @item --construct-floats
1383 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1384 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1385 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1386 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1387 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1388 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1389
1390 @item --relax-branch
1391 @itemx --no-relax-branch
1392 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1393 branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1394 out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1395
1396 @item -mnan=@var{encoding}
1397 Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
1398 (@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default.
1399
1400 @cindex emulation
1401 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1402 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1403 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was
1404 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1405 It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1406
1407 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1408 @samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1409 is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1410 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1411 preferred options instead.
1412
1413 @item -nocpp
1414 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1415 the native tools.
1416
1417 @item --trap
1418 @itemx --no-trap
1419 @itemx --break
1420 @itemx --no-break
1421 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1422 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1423 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1424 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1425 break exception.
1426
1427 @item -n
1428 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1429 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1430 @end table
1431 @end ifset
1432
1433 @ifset MCORE
1434 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1435 an MCore processor.
1436
1437 @table @gcctabopt
1438 @item -jsri2bsr
1439 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1440 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1441 The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1442
1443 @item -sifilter
1444 @itemx -nosifilter
1445 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1446 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1447
1448 @item -relax
1449 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1450
1451 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1452 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1453 can be assembled.
1454
1455 @item -EB
1456 Assemble for a big endian target.
1457
1458 @item -EL
1459 Assemble for a little endian target.
1460
1461 @end table
1462 @end ifset
1463 @c man end
1464
1465 @ifset METAG
1466
1467 @ifclear man
1468 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1469 for a Meta processor.
1470 @end ifclear
1471
1472 @ifset man
1473 @c man begin OPTIONS
1474 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1475 Meta processor.
1476 @c man end
1477 @c man begin INCLUDE
1478 @include c-metag.texi
1479 @c ended inside the included file
1480 @end ifset
1481
1482 @end ifset
1483
1484 @c man begin OPTIONS
1485 @ifset MMIX
1486 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1487 @end ifset
1488
1489 @ifset NDS32
1490
1491 @ifclear man
1492 @xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1493 for a NDS32 processor.
1494 @end ifclear
1495 @c ended inside the included file
1496 @end ifset
1497
1498 @ifset man
1499 @c man begin OPTIONS
1500 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1501 NDS32 processor.
1502 @c man end
1503 @c man begin INCLUDE
1504 @include c-nds32.texi
1505 @c ended inside the included file
1506 @end ifset
1507
1508 @c man end
1509 @ifset PPC
1510
1511 @ifclear man
1512 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1513 for a PowerPC processor.
1514 @end ifclear
1515
1516 @ifset man
1517 @c man begin OPTIONS
1518 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1519 PowerPC processor.
1520 @c man end
1521 @c man begin INCLUDE
1522 @include c-ppc.texi
1523 @c ended inside the included file
1524 @end ifset
1525
1526 @end ifset
1527
1528 @c man begin OPTIONS
1529 @ifset RX
1530 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1531 @end ifset
1532
1533 @ifset S390
1534 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1535 processor family.
1536
1537 @table @gcctabopt
1538 @item -m31
1539 @itemx -m64
1540 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1541 @item -mesa
1542 @item -mzarch
1543 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1544 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1545 @item -march=@var{processor}
1546 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g6}, @samp{g6},
1547 @samp{z900}, @samp{z990}, @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec}, @samp{z10},
1548 @samp{z196}, or @samp{zEC12}.
1549 @item -mregnames
1550 @itemx -mno-regnames
1551 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1552 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1553 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1554 but evaluates to zero.
1555 @end table
1556 @end ifset
1557 @c man end
1558
1559 @ifset TIC6X
1560
1561 @ifclear man
1562 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1563 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1564 @end ifclear
1565
1566 @ifset man
1567 @c man begin OPTIONS
1568 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1569 TMS320C6000 processor.
1570 @c man end
1571 @c man begin INCLUDE
1572 @include c-tic6x.texi
1573 @c ended inside the included file
1574 @end ifset
1575
1576 @end ifset
1577
1578 @ifset TILEGX
1579
1580 @ifclear man
1581 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1582 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1583 @end ifclear
1584
1585 @ifset man
1586 @c man begin OPTIONS
1587 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1588 processor.
1589 @c man end
1590 @c man begin INCLUDE
1591 @include c-tilegx.texi
1592 @c ended inside the included file
1593 @end ifset
1594
1595 @end ifset
1596
1597 @ifset XTENSA
1598
1599 @ifclear man
1600 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1601 for an Xtensa processor.
1602 @end ifclear
1603
1604 @ifset man
1605 @c man begin OPTIONS
1606 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1607 Xtensa processor.
1608 @c man end
1609 @c man begin INCLUDE
1610 @include c-xtensa.texi
1611 @c ended inside the included file
1612 @end ifset
1613
1614 @end ifset
1615
1616 @c man begin OPTIONS
1617
1618 @ifset Z80
1619 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1620 a Z80 family processor.
1621 @table @gcctabopt
1622 @item -z80
1623 Assemble for Z80 processor.
1624 @item -r800
1625 Assemble for R800 processor.
1626 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1627 @itemx -Wnud
1628 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1629 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1630 @itemx -Wnup
1631 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1632 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1633 @itemx -Wud
1634 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1635 @item -warn-unportable-instructions
1636 @itemx -Wup
1637 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1638 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1639 @itemx -Fud
1640 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1641 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1642 @itemx -Fup
1643 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1644 @end table
1645 @end ifset
1646
1647 @c man end
1648
1649 @menu
1650 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1651 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1652 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1653 * Command Line:: Command Line
1654 * Input Files:: Input Files
1655 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1656 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1657 @end menu
1658
1659 @node Manual
1660 @section Structure of this Manual
1661
1662 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1663 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1664 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1665 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1666 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1667
1668 @ifclear GENERIC
1669 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1670 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1671 @end ifclear
1672 @ifset GENERIC
1673 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1674 various flavors of the assembler.
1675 @end ifset
1676
1677 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1678 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1679 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1680 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1681 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1682 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1683 particular architecture.
1684 @ifset GENERIC
1685 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1686 machine architecture manual for this information.
1687 @end ifset
1688 @ifclear GENERIC
1689 @ifset H8/300
1690 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1691 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1692 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1693 @end ifset
1694 @ifset SH
1695 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1696 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1697 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1698 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1699 @end ifset
1700 @ifset Z8000
1701 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1702 @end ifset
1703 @end ifclear
1704
1705 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1706 @ignore
1707 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1708 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1709 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1710 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1711 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1712 qualification.
1713
1714 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1715 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1716 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
1717 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1718 @end ignore
1719
1720 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1721 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
1722 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1723 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1724 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1725 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1726 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1727 @c directives).
1728
1729 @node GNU Assembler
1730 @section The GNU Assembler
1731
1732 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1733
1734 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1735 @ifclear GENERIC
1736 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1737 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1738 @end ifclear
1739 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1740 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1741 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
1742 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1743 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1744
1745 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1746 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1747 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1748 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1749 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1750 machine would assemble.
1751 @ifset VAX
1752 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1753 @end ifset
1754 @ifset M680X0
1755 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1756 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1757 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1758 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1759 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1760 @end ifset
1761
1762 @c man end
1763
1764 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1765 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
1766 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1767
1768 @node Object Formats
1769 @section Object File Formats
1770
1771 @cindex object file format
1772 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1773 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
1774 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1775 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
1776 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1777 @ifclear GENERIC
1778 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1779 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1780 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1781 @end ifclear
1782 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1783 @ifset I960
1784 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1785 @code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1786 @end ifset
1787 @ifset HPPA
1788 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1789 SOM or ELF format object files.
1790 @end ifset
1791 @end ifclear
1792
1793 @node Command Line
1794 @section Command Line
1795
1796 @cindex command line conventions
1797
1798 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1799 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
1800 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
1801 significant.
1802
1803 @cindex standard input, as input file
1804 @kindex --
1805 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1806 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
1807
1808 @cindex options, command line
1809 Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
1810 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
1811 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
1812 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
1813 the letter is important. All options are optional.
1814
1815 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
1816 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
1817 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
1818 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
1819
1820 @smallexample
1821 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
1822 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
1823 @end smallexample
1824
1825 @node Input Files
1826 @section Input Files
1827
1828 @cindex input
1829 @cindex source program
1830 @cindex files, input
1831 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
1832 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
1833 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
1834 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
1835
1836 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
1837 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
1838 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
1839 order specified.
1840
1841 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1842 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
1843 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
1844 (The standard input is also a file.)
1845
1846 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
1847 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
1848 command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
1849 is taken to be an input file name.
1850
1851 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
1852 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
1853 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
1854 to assemble.
1855
1856 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
1857 in your command line.
1858
1859 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
1860 file.
1861
1862 @c man end
1863
1864 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
1865
1866 @cindex input file linenumbers
1867 @cindex line numbers, in input files
1868 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
1869 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
1870 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
1871 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
1872
1873 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
1874 to @command{@value{AS}}.
1875
1876 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
1877 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
1878 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
1879 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
1880 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
1881 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
1882
1883 @node Object
1884 @section Output (Object) File
1885
1886 @cindex object file
1887 @cindex output file
1888 @kindex a.out
1889 @kindex .o
1890 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
1891 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
1892 is the object file. Its default name is
1893 @ifclear BOUT
1894 @code{a.out}.
1895 @end ifclear
1896 @ifset BOUT
1897 @ifset GENERIC
1898 @code{a.out}, or
1899 @end ifset
1900 @code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
1901 @end ifset
1902 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
1903 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
1904 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
1905 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
1906 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
1907
1908 @cindex linker
1909 @kindex ld
1910 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
1911 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
1912 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
1913 information for the debugger.
1914
1915 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
1916 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
1917
1918 @node Errors
1919 @section Error and Warning Messages
1920
1921 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1922
1923 @cindex error messages
1924 @cindex warning messages
1925 @cindex messages from assembler
1926 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
1927 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
1928 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
1929 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
1930 grave problem that stops the assembly.
1931
1932 @c man end
1933
1934 @cindex format of warning messages
1935 Warning messages have the format
1936
1937 @smallexample
1938 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
1939 @end smallexample
1940
1941 @noindent
1942 @cindex line numbers, in warnings/errors
1943 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If a logical file name has been given
1944 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) it is used for the filename, otherwise the name of
1945 the current input file is used. If a logical line number was given
1946 @ifset GENERIC
1947 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
1948 @end ifset
1949 then it is used to calculate the number printed,
1950 otherwise the actual line in the current source file is printed. The
1951 message text is intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix
1952 tradition).
1953
1954 @cindex format of error messages
1955 Error messages have the format
1956 @smallexample
1957 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
1958 @end smallexample
1959 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
1960 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
1961 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
1962
1963 @node Invoking
1964 @chapter Command-Line Options
1965
1966 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
1967 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
1968 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
1969 for options specific
1970 @ifclear GENERIC
1971 to the @value{TARGET} target.
1972 @end ifclear
1973 @ifset GENERIC
1974 to particular machine architectures.
1975 @end ifset
1976
1977 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1978
1979 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
1980 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
1981 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
1982 by commas. For example:
1983
1984 @smallexample
1985 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
1986 @end smallexample
1987
1988 @noindent
1989 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
1990 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
1991 local symbols in the symbol table).
1992
1993 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
1994 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
1995 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
1996 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
1997 assembler.)
1998
1999 @c man end
2000
2001 @menu
2002 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
2003 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
2004 * D:: -D for compatibility
2005 * f:: -f to work faster
2006 * I:: -I for .include search path
2007 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2008 * K:: -K for compatibility
2009 @end ifclear
2010 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2011 * K:: -K for difference tables
2012 @end ifset
2013
2014 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
2015 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
2016 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
2017 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
2018 * o:: -o to name the object file
2019 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
2020 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
2021 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
2022 * v:: -v to announce version
2023 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
2024 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
2025 @end menu
2026
2027 @node a
2028 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
2029
2030 @kindex -a
2031 @kindex -ac
2032 @kindex -ad
2033 @kindex -ag
2034 @kindex -ah
2035 @kindex -al
2036 @kindex -an
2037 @kindex -as
2038 @cindex listings, enabling
2039 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
2040
2041 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
2042 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
2043 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
2044 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
2045 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
2046 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
2047 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
2048 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
2049 also.
2050
2051 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2052 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2053
2054 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
2055 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2056 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2057 omitted from the listing.
2058
2059 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2060 listing.
2061
2062 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2063 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2064 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2065 @code{.sbttl}.
2066 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2067 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2068 listing-control directives have no effect.
2069
2070 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2071 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2072
2073 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2074 because it
2075 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
2076 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2077 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2078 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2079 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2080
2081 @node alternate
2082 @section @option{--alternate}
2083
2084 @kindex --alternate
2085 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2086
2087 @node D
2088 @section @option{-D}
2089
2090 @kindex -D
2091 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2092 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2093 @command{@value{AS}}.
2094
2095 @node f
2096 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2097
2098 @kindex -f
2099 @cindex trusted compiler
2100 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2101 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2102 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2103 and comment preprocessing on
2104 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2105 ,Preprocessing}.
2106
2107 @quotation
2108 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2109 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2110 not work correctly.
2111 @end quotation
2112
2113 @node I
2114 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2115
2116 @kindex -I @var{path}
2117 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
2118 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
2119 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
2120 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2121 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2122 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2123 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2124 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2125 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2126 specified (left to right) on the command line.
2127
2128 @node K
2129 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2130
2131 @kindex -K
2132 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2133 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2134 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2135 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2136 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2137 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2138 alteration on other platforms.
2139 @end ifclear
2140
2141 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2142 @cindex difference tables, warning
2143 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2144 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2145 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2146 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2147 is done.
2148 @end ifset
2149
2150 @node L
2151 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2152
2153 @kindex -L
2154 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2155 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2156 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2157 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2158 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2159 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2160 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2161 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2162
2163 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2164 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2165 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2166
2167 @node listing
2168 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2169
2170 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2171 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2172 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2173 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2174 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2175 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2176 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2177 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2178
2179 @table @gcctabopt
2180 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2181 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2182 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2183 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2184 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2185
2186 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2187 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2188 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2189 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2190 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2191 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2192 switch is used the default is to one.
2193
2194 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2195 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2196 @cindex Width of source line output
2197 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2198 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2199 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2200
2201 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2202 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2203 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2204 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2205 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2206 @end table
2207
2208 @node M
2209 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2210
2211 @kindex -M
2212 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2213 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2214 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2215 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2216 configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the
2217 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2218 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2219 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2220 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2221
2222 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2223 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2224 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2225 individually. These are:
2226
2227 @itemize @bullet
2228 @item global symbols in common section
2229
2230 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2231 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2232 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2233 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2234 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2235
2236 @item complex relocations
2237
2238 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2239 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2240 are not support by other object file formats.
2241
2242 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2243
2244 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2245 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2246 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2247 script.
2248
2249 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2250
2251 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2252 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2253
2254 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2255
2256 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2257 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2258 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2259 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2260 assigned within a linker script.
2261 @end itemize
2262
2263 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2264 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2265 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2266
2267 @itemize @bullet
2268
2269 @item EBCDIC strings
2270
2271 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2272
2273 @item packed binary coded decimal
2274
2275 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2276 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2277
2278 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2279
2280 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2281
2282 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2283
2284 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2285
2286 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2287
2288 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2289 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2290 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2291 these options serve no purpose.
2292
2293 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2294
2295 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2296 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2297 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2298
2299 @item other @code{OPT} options
2300
2301 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2302 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2303
2304 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2305
2306 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2307 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2308
2309 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2310
2311 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2312
2313 @item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2314
2315 The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2316
2317 @item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2318
2319 The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2320
2321 @item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2322
2323 The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2324
2325 @item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2326
2327 The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2328
2329 @item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2330
2331 The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2332
2333 @item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2334
2335 The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2336
2337 @end itemize
2338
2339 @node MD
2340 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2341
2342 @kindex --MD
2343 @cindex dependency tracking
2344 @cindex make rules
2345
2346 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2347 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2348 dependencies of the main source file.
2349
2350 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2351
2352 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2353
2354 @node o
2355 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2356
2357 @kindex -o
2358 @cindex naming object file
2359 @cindex object file name
2360 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2361 default it has the name
2362 @ifset GENERIC
2363 @ifset I960
2364 @file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2365 @end ifset
2366 @ifclear I960
2367 @file{a.out}.
2368 @end ifclear
2369 @end ifset
2370 @ifclear GENERIC
2371 @ifset I960
2372 @file{b.out}.
2373 @end ifset
2374 @ifclear I960
2375 @file{a.out}.
2376 @end ifclear
2377 @end ifclear
2378 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2379 object file a different name.
2380
2381 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2382 existing file of the same name.
2383
2384 @node R
2385 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2386
2387 @kindex -R
2388 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2389 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2390 @cindex joining text and data sections
2391 @cindex merging text and data sections
2392 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2393 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2394 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2395 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2396 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2397 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2398
2399 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2400 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2401 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2402 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2403
2404 @ifset COFF-ELF
2405 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2406 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2407 @samp{.data}.
2408 @end ifset
2409
2410 @ifset HPPA
2411 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2412 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2413 @end ifset
2414
2415 @node statistics
2416 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2417
2418 @kindex --statistics
2419 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2420 @cindex time, total for assembly
2421 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2422 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2423 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2424 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2425 seconds).
2426
2427 @node traditional-format
2428 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2429
2430 @kindex --traditional-format
2431 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2432 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2433 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2434
2435 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2436 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2437
2438 @node v
2439 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2440
2441 @kindex -v
2442 @kindex -version
2443 @cindex assembler version
2444 @cindex version of assembler
2445 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2446 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2447 command line.
2448
2449 @node W
2450 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2451
2452 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2453 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2454 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2455 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2456
2457 @kindex -W
2458 @kindex --no-warn
2459 @cindex suppressing warnings
2460 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2461 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2462 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2463 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2464 are still reported.
2465
2466 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2467 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2468 @cindex warnings, causing error
2469 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2470 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2471
2472 @kindex --warn
2473 @cindex warnings, switching on
2474 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2475 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2476
2477 @node Z
2478 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2479 @cindex object file, after errors
2480 @cindex errors, continuing after
2481 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2482 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2483 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2484 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2485 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2486 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2487
2488 @node Syntax
2489 @chapter Syntax
2490
2491 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2492 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2493 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2494 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2495 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2496 @ifclear VAX
2497 assembler.
2498 @end ifclear
2499 @ifset VAX
2500 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2501 @end ifset
2502
2503 @menu
2504 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2505 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2506 * Comments:: Comments
2507 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2508 * Statements:: Statements
2509 * Constants:: Constants
2510 @end menu
2511
2512 @node Preprocessing
2513 @section Preprocessing
2514
2515 @cindex preprocessing
2516 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2517 @itemize @bullet
2518 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2519 @item
2520 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2521 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2522 a single space.
2523
2524 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2525 @item
2526 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2527 appropriate number of newlines.
2528
2529 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2530 @item
2531 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2532 @end itemize
2533
2534 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2535 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2536 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2537 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2538 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2539 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2540 Output, gcc.info, Using GNU CC}.
2541
2542 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2543 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2544 preprocessed.
2545
2546 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2547 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2548 @kindex #NO_APP
2549 @kindex #APP
2550 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2551 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2552 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2553 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2554 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2555 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2556 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2557 and whitespace.
2558
2559 @node Whitespace
2560 @section Whitespace
2561
2562 @cindex whitespace
2563 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2564 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2565 people to read. Unless within character constants
2566 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2567 as exactly one space.
2568
2569 @node Comments
2570 @section Comments
2571
2572 @cindex comments
2573 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2574 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2575
2576 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2577 This means you may not nest these comments.
2578
2579 @smallexample
2580 /*
2581 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2582 is to use this sort of comment.
2583 */
2584
2585 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2586 @end smallexample
2587
2588 @cindex line comment character
2589 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2590 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2591 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2592 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2593 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2594 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2595 upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the
2596 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2597
2598 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2599 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2600 to specify logical line numbers:
2601
2602 @kindex #
2603 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2604 @cindex logical line numbers
2605 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2606 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2607 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2608 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2609 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2610
2611 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2612 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2613
2614 @smallexample
2615 # This is an ordinary comment.
2616 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2617 # This is logical line # 36.
2618 @end smallexample
2619 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2620 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2621
2622 @node Symbol Intro
2623 @section Symbols
2624
2625 @cindex characters used in symbols
2626 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2627 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2628 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2629 @samp{_.$}.
2630 @end ifclear
2631 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2632 @ifclear GENERIC
2633 @ifset H8
2634 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2635 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2636 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2637 symbol names.)
2638 @end ifset
2639 @end ifclear
2640 @end ifset
2641 @ifset GENERIC
2642 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2643 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2644 @end ifset
2645 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2646 There is no length limit: all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2647 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2648 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2649 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2650 @cindex length of symbols
2651
2652 @node Statements
2653 @section Statements
2654
2655 @cindex statements, structure of
2656 @cindex line separator character
2657 @cindex statement separator character
2658
2659 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2660 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2661 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2662 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2663 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2664 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2665 exception: they do not end statements.
2666
2667 @cindex newline, required at file end
2668 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2669 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2670 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2671
2672 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2673
2674 @cindex instructions and directives
2675 @cindex directives and instructions
2676 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2677 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2678 @c 13feb91.
2679 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2680 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2681 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2682 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2683 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2684 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2685 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2686 @ifset GENERIC
2687 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2688 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2689 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2690 language.@refill
2691 @end ifset
2692
2693 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2694 @cindex label (@code{:})
2695 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2696 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2697 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2698
2699 @ifset HPPA
2700 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2701 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
2702 only one label may be defined on each line.
2703 @end ifset
2704
2705 @smallexample
2706 label: .directive followed by something
2707 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
2708 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2709 @end smallexample
2710
2711 @node Constants
2712 @section Constants
2713
2714 @cindex constants
2715 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2716 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
2717 @smallexample
2718 @group
2719 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2720 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
2721 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2722 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2723 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
2724 @end group
2725 @end smallexample
2726
2727 @menu
2728 * Characters:: Character Constants
2729 * Numbers:: Number Constants
2730 @end menu
2731
2732 @node Characters
2733 @subsection Character Constants
2734
2735 @cindex character constants
2736 @cindex constants, character
2737 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
2738 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2739 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
2740 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2741 used in arithmetic expressions.
2742
2743 @menu
2744 * Strings:: Strings
2745 * Chars:: Characters
2746 @end menu
2747
2748 @node Strings
2749 @subsubsection Strings
2750
2751 @cindex string constants
2752 @cindex constants, string
2753 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
2754 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
2755 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2756 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
2757 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2758 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2759 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2760 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
2761
2762 @cindex escape codes, character
2763 @cindex character escape codes
2764 @table @kbd
2765 @c @item \a
2766 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2767 @c
2768 @cindex @code{\b} (backspace character)
2769 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2770 @item \b
2771 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2772
2773 @c @item \e
2774 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2775 @c
2776 @cindex @code{\f} (formfeed character)
2777 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
2778 @item \f
2779 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
2780
2781 @cindex @code{\n} (newline character)
2782 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
2783 @item \n
2784 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
2785
2786 @c @item \p
2787 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
2788 @c
2789 @cindex @code{\r} (carriage return character)
2790 @cindex carriage return (@code{\r})
2791 @item \r
2792 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
2793
2794 @c @item \s
2795 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
2796 @c other assemblers.
2797 @c
2798 @cindex @code{\t} (tab)
2799 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
2800 @item \t
2801 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
2802
2803 @c @item \v
2804 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
2805 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2806 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
2807 @c
2808 @cindex @code{\@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
2809 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
2810 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2811 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
2812 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
2813 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
2814
2815 @cindex @code{\@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
2816 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
2817 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
2818 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
2819 lower case @code{x} works.
2820
2821 @cindex @code{\\} (@samp{\} character)
2822 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
2823 @item \\
2824 Represents one @samp{\} character.
2825
2826 @c @item \'
2827 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
2828 @c This is needed in single character literals
2829 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
2830 @c a @samp{'}.
2831 @c
2832 @cindex @code{\"} (doublequote character)
2833 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
2834 @item \"
2835 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
2836 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
2837
2838 @item \ @var{anything-else}
2839 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
2840 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
2841 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
2842 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
2843 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
2844 code and warns you of the fact.
2845 @end table
2846
2847 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
2848 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
2849 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
2850 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
2851 sequence.
2852
2853 @node Chars
2854 @subsubsection Characters
2855
2856 @cindex single character constant
2857 @cindex character, single
2858 @cindex constant, single character
2859 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately
2860 followed by that character. The same escapes apply to characters as
2861 to strings. So if you want to write the character backslash, you
2862 must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second
2863 @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a
2864 grave accent. A newline
2865 @ifclear GENERIC
2866 @ifclear abnormal-separator
2867 (or semicolon @samp{;})
2868 @end ifclear
2869 @ifset abnormal-separator
2870 @ifset H8
2871 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
2872 Renesas SH)
2873 @end ifset
2874 @end ifset
2875 @end ifclear
2876 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
2877 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
2878 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
2879 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
2880 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
2881
2882 @node Numbers
2883 @subsection Number Constants
2884
2885 @cindex constants, number
2886 @cindex number constants
2887 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
2888 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
2889 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
2890 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
2891 are floating point numbers, described below.
2892
2893 @menu
2894 * Integers:: Integers
2895 * Bignums:: Bignums
2896 * Flonums:: Flonums
2897 @ifclear GENERIC
2898 @ifset I960
2899 * Bit Fields:: Bit Fields
2900 @end ifset
2901 @end ifclear
2902 @end menu
2903
2904 @node Integers
2905 @subsubsection Integers
2906 @cindex integers
2907 @cindex constants, integer
2908
2909 @cindex binary integers
2910 @cindex integers, binary
2911 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
2912 the binary digits @samp{01}.
2913
2914 @cindex octal integers
2915 @cindex integers, octal
2916 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
2917 digits (@samp{01234567}).
2918
2919 @cindex decimal integers
2920 @cindex integers, decimal
2921 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
2922 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
2923
2924 @cindex hexadecimal integers
2925 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
2926 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
2927 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
2928
2929 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
2930 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
2931 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
2932
2933 @node Bignums
2934 @subsubsection Bignums
2935
2936 @cindex bignums
2937 @cindex constants, bignum
2938 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
2939 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
2940 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
2941 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
2942
2943 @node Flonums
2944 @subsubsection Flonums
2945 @cindex flonums
2946 @cindex floating point numbers
2947 @cindex constants, floating point
2948
2949 @cindex precision, floating point
2950 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
2951 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
2952 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
2953 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
2954 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
2955 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
2956
2957 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
2958 @itemize @bullet
2959 @item
2960 The digit @samp{0}.
2961 @ifset HPPA
2962 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
2963 @end ifset
2964
2965 @item
2966 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
2967 @ifset GENERIC
2968 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
2969 @ignore
2970 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
2971 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
2972 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
2973 @end ignore
2974
2975 On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
2976 and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
2977 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
2978
2979 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
2980 (in upper or lower case).
2981
2982 On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
2983 one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
2984
2985 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
2986 @end ifset
2987 @ifclear GENERIC
2988 @ifset ARC
2989 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
2990 @end ifset
2991 @ifset H8
2992 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
2993 @end ifset
2994 @ifset HPPA
2995 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
2996 @end ifset
2997 @ifset I960
2998 One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
2999 @end ifset
3000 @end ifclear
3001
3002 @item
3003 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3004
3005 @item
3006 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
3007
3008 @item
3009 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
3010 or more decimal digits.
3011
3012 @item
3013 An optional exponent, consisting of:
3014
3015 @itemize @bullet
3016 @item
3017 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
3018 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
3019 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
3020 @item
3021 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3022 @item
3023 One or more decimal digits.
3024 @end itemize
3025
3026 @end itemize
3027
3028 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
3029 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
3030
3031 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
3032 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
3033 @command{@value{AS}}.
3034
3035 @ifclear GENERIC
3036 @ifset I960
3037 @c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
3038 @c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
3039 @c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
3040 @node Bit Fields
3041 @subsubsection Bit Fields
3042
3043 @cindex bit fields
3044 @cindex constants, bit field
3045 You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
3046 Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
3047 @example
3048 @var{mask}:@var{value}
3049 @end example
3050 @noindent
3051 @command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
3052 @var{value}.
3053
3054 The resulting number is then packed
3055 @ifset GENERIC
3056 @c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
3057 (in host-dependent byte order)
3058 @end ifset
3059 into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
3060 bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
3061 requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
3062 more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
3063 least significant digits.@refill
3064
3065 The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
3066 @code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
3067 @end ifset
3068 @end ifclear
3069
3070 @node Sections
3071 @chapter Sections and Relocation
3072 @cindex sections
3073 @cindex relocation
3074
3075 @menu
3076 * Secs Background:: Background
3077 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3078 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3079 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3080 * bss:: bss Section
3081 @end menu
3082
3083 @node Secs Background
3084 @section Background
3085
3086 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3087 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3088 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3089
3090 @cindex linker, and assembler
3091 @cindex assembler, and linker
3092 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3093 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3094 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3095 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3096 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3097 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3098 sections.
3099
3100 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3101 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3102 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3103 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3104 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3105 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3106 the proper run-time addresses.
3107 @ifset H8
3108 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3109 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3110 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3111 @end ifset
3112
3113 @cindex standard assembler sections
3114 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3115 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3116 @dfn{bss} sections.
3117
3118 @ifset COFF-ELF
3119 @ifset GENERIC
3120 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3121 @end ifset
3122 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3123 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3124 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3125 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3126 @end ifset
3127
3128 @ifset HPPA
3129 @ifset GENERIC
3130 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3131 @end ifset
3132 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3133 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3134 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3135 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3136 assembler directives.
3137
3138 @ifset SOM
3139 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3140 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3141 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3142 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3143 @end ifset
3144 @end ifset
3145
3146 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3147 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3148
3149 @ifset HPPA
3150 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3151 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3152 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3153 @end ifset
3154
3155 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3156 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3157 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3158 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3159 file is mentioned:
3160 @itemize @bullet
3161 @item
3162 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3163 an address?
3164 @item
3165 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3166 @item
3167 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3168 @display
3169 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3170 @end display
3171 @item
3172 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3173 @end itemize
3174
3175 @cindex addresses, format of
3176 @cindex section-relative addressing
3177 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3178 @display
3179 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3180 @end display
3181 @noindent
3182 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3183 nature.
3184 @ifset SOM
3185 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3186 symbol-relative instead.)
3187 @end ifset
3188
3189 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3190 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3191
3192 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3193 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3194 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3195 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3196 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3197 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3198 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3199 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3200 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3201
3202 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3203 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3204 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3205 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3206 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3207 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3208 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3209
3210 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3211 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3212 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3213 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3214 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3215 data and bss sections.
3216
3217 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3218 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3219
3220 @node Ld Sections
3221 @section Linker Sections
3222 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3223
3224 @table @strong
3225
3226 @ifset COFF-ELF
3227 @cindex named sections
3228 @cindex sections, named
3229 @item named sections
3230 @end ifset
3231 @ifset aout-bout
3232 @cindex text section
3233 @cindex data section
3234 @itemx text section
3235 @itemx data section
3236 @end ifset
3237 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3238 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3239 true of another.
3240 @c @ifset aout-bout
3241 When the program is running, however, it is
3242 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3243 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3244 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3245 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3246 in the data section.
3247 @c @end ifset
3248
3249 @cindex bss section
3250 @item bss section
3251 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3252 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3253 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3254 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3255 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3256 those explicit zeros from object files.
3257
3258 @cindex absolute section
3259 @item absolute section
3260 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3261 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3262 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3263 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3264
3265 @cindex undefined section
3266 @item undefined section
3267 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3268 the preceding sections.
3269 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3270 @end table
3271
3272 @cindex relocation example
3273 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3274 @ifset COFF-ELF
3275 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3276 @end ifset
3277 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3278
3279 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3280 @ifnottex
3281 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3282 @smallexample
3283 +-----+----+--+
3284 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3285 +-----+----+--+
3286
3287 text data bss
3288 seg. seg. seg.
3289
3290 +---+---+---+
3291 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3292 +---+---+---+
3293
3294 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3295 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3296 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3297
3298 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3299 @end smallexample
3300 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3301 @end ifnottex
3302 @need 5000
3303 @tex
3304 \bigskip
3305 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3306 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3307 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3308
3309 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3310 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3311 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3312
3313 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3314 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3315 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3316 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3317 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3318
3319 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3320 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3321
3322 @end tex
3323 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3324
3325 @node As Sections
3326 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3327
3328 @cindex internal assembler sections
3329 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3330 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3331 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3332 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3333 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3334 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3335 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3336 section-relative address.
3337
3338 @table @b
3339 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3340 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3341 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3342 bug in the assembler.
3343
3344 @cindex expr (internal section)
3345 @item expr section
3346 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3347 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3348 it in the expr section.
3349 @c FIXME item debug
3350 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3351 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3352 @c FIXME item register
3353 @end table
3354
3355 @node Sub-Sections
3356 @section Sub-Sections
3357
3358 @cindex numbered subsections
3359 @cindex grouping data
3360 @ifset aout-bout
3361 Assembled bytes
3362 @ifset COFF-ELF
3363 conventionally
3364 @end ifset
3365 fall into two sections: text and data.
3366 @end ifset
3367 You may have separate groups of
3368 @ifset GENERIC
3369 data in named sections
3370 @end ifset
3371 @ifclear GENERIC
3372 @ifclear aout-bout
3373 data in named sections
3374 @end ifclear
3375 @ifset aout-bout
3376 text or data
3377 @end ifset
3378 @end ifclear
3379 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3380 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3381 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3382 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3383 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3384 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3385 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3386 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3387 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3388 constants being output.
3389
3390 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3391 goes in subsection number zero.
3392
3393 @ifset GENERIC
3394 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3395 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3396 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3397 @end ifset
3398 @ifclear GENERIC
3399 @ifset H8
3400 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3401 boundary (two bytes).
3402 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3403 @end ifset
3404 @ifset I960
3405 @c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3406 @c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3407 @c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3408 @c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue,
3409 @c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3410 @c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3411 @end ifset
3412 @end ifclear
3413
3414 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3415 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3416 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3417 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3418 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3419 data subsections as a data section.
3420
3421 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3422 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3423 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3424 @ifset COFF
3425 @ifset GENERIC
3426 When generating COFF output, you
3427 @end ifset
3428 @ifclear GENERIC
3429 You
3430 @end ifclear
3431 can also use an extra subsection
3432 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3433 @var{expression}}.
3434 @end ifset
3435 @ifset ELF
3436 @ifset GENERIC
3437 When generating ELF output, you
3438 @end ifset
3439 @ifclear GENERIC
3440 You
3441 @end ifclear
3442 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3443 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3444 @end ifset
3445 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3446 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3447 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3448 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3449 @smallexample
3450 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3451 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3452 .text 1
3453 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3454 .data 0
3455 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3456 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3457 .text 0
3458 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3459 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3460 @end smallexample
3461
3462 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3463 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3464 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3465 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3466 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3467 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3468 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3469
3470 @node bss
3471 @section bss Section
3472
3473 @cindex bss section
3474 @cindex common variable storage
3475 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3476 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3477 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3478 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3479 section are zeroed bytes.
3480
3481 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3482 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3483
3484 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3485 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3486
3487 @ifset GENERIC
3488 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3489 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3490 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3491 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3492 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3493 @end ifset
3494
3495 @node Symbols
3496 @chapter Symbols
3497
3498 @cindex symbols
3499 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3500 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3501 to debug.
3502
3503 @quotation
3504 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3505 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3506 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3507 @end quotation
3508
3509 @menu
3510 * Labels:: Labels
3511 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3512 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3513 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3514 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3515 @end menu
3516
3517 @node Labels
3518 @section Labels
3519
3520 @cindex labels
3521 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3522 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3523 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3524 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3525 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3526 definitions.
3527
3528 @ifset HPPA
3529 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3530 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3531 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3532 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3533 @end ifset
3534
3535 @node Setting Symbols
3536 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3537
3538 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3539 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3540 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3541 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3542 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3543 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3544 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3545 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3546
3547 @ifset Blackfin
3548 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3549 @end ifset
3550
3551 @node Symbol Names
3552 @section Symbol Names
3553
3554 @cindex symbol names
3555 @cindex names, symbol
3556 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3557 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3558 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3559 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3560 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3561 particular target machine), and underscores.
3562 @end ifclear
3563 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3564 @ifset H8
3565 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3566 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3567 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3568 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3569 @end ifset
3570 @end ifset
3571
3572 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3573 than @code{Foo}.
3574
3575 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3576 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3577 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3578 currently supported.
3579
3580 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3581 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3582 in a program.
3583
3584 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3585
3586 @cindex local symbol names
3587 @cindex symbol names, local
3588 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3589 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3590 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3591 set of local label prefixes.
3592 @ifset HPPA
3593 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3594 @end ifset
3595
3596 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3597 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3598 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols:
3599 @option{-L}}) to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3600
3601 @subheading Local Labels
3602
3603 @cindex local labels
3604 @cindex temporary symbol names
3605 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3606 Local labels help compilers and programmers use names temporarily.
3607 They create symbols which are guaranteed to be unique over the entire scope of
3608 the input source code and which can be referred to by a simple notation.
3609 To define a local label, write a label of the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N}
3610 represents any positive integer). To refer to the most recent previous
3611 definition of that label write @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when
3612 you defined the label. To refer to the next definition of a local label, write
3613 @samp{@b{N}f}---the @samp{b} stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands
3614 for ``forwards''.
3615
3616 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3617 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3618 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3619 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3620 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3621 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3622 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3623
3624 Here is an example:
3625
3626 @smallexample
3627 1: branch 1f
3628 2: branch 1b
3629 1: branch 2f
3630 2: branch 1b
3631 @end smallexample
3632
3633 Which is the equivalent of:
3634
3635 @smallexample
3636 label_1: branch label_3
3637 label_2: branch label_1
3638 label_3: branch label_4
3639 label_4: branch label_3
3640 @end smallexample
3641
3642 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3643 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3644 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3645 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3646 these parts:
3647
3648 @table @code
3649 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3650 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3651 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3652 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3653 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3654 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3655 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3656 you may use them in debugging.
3657
3658 @item @var{number}
3659 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3660 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3661
3662 @item @kbd{C-B}
3663 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3664 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3665
3666 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3667 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3668 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3669 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3670 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3671 @end table
3672
3673 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3674 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3675
3676 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3677 @cindex dollar local symbols
3678
3679 @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of local labels called
3680 dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they become undefined) as
3681 soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain valid for only a small
3682 region of the input source code. Normal local labels, by contrast, remain in
3683 scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined by another occurrence of
3684 the same local label.
3685
3686 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3687 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3688 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3689
3690 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3691 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3692 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3693 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3694
3695 @node Dot
3696 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3697
3698 @cindex dot (symbol)
3699 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3700 @cindex current address
3701 @cindex location counter
3702 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3703 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3704 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3705 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3706 directive.
3707 @ifclear no-space-dir
3708 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3709 @samp{.space 4}.
3710 @end ifclear
3711
3712 @node Symbol Attributes
3713 @section Symbol Attributes
3714
3715 @cindex symbol attributes
3716 @cindex attributes, symbol
3717 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3718 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3719 attributes.
3720 @ifset INTERNALS
3721 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3722 @end ifset
3723
3724 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3725 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3726 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3727 would want.
3728
3729 @menu
3730 * Symbol Value:: Value
3731 * Symbol Type:: Type
3732 @ifset aout-bout
3733 @ifset GENERIC
3734 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3735 @end ifset
3736 @ifclear GENERIC
3737 @ifclear BOUT
3738 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3739 @end ifclear
3740 @ifset BOUT
3741 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3742 @end ifset
3743 @end ifclear
3744 @end ifset
3745 @ifset COFF
3746 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
3747 @end ifset
3748 @ifset SOM
3749 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
3750 @end ifset
3751 @end menu
3752
3753 @node Symbol Value
3754 @subsection Value
3755
3756 @cindex value of a symbol
3757 @cindex symbol value
3758 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
3759 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3760 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3761 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3762 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
3763 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3764 called absolute.
3765
3766 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
3767 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
3768 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3769 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3770 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3771 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3772 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
3773 allocated storage.
3774
3775 @node Symbol Type
3776 @subsection Type
3777
3778 @cindex type of a symbol
3779 @cindex symbol type
3780 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
3781 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
3782 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
3783 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
3784
3785 @ifset aout-bout
3786 @ifclear GENERIC
3787 @ifset BOUT
3788 @c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be
3789 @c better if it were available outside examples.
3790 @need 1000
3791 @node a.out Symbols
3792 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3793
3794 @cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
3795 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
3796 These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
3797 one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
3798 @code{b.out}.
3799
3800 @end ifset
3801 @ifclear BOUT
3802 @node a.out Symbols
3803 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3804
3805 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3806 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3807
3808 @end ifclear
3809 @end ifclear
3810 @ifset GENERIC
3811 @node a.out Symbols
3812 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3813
3814 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3815 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3816
3817 @end ifset
3818 @menu
3819 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
3820 * Symbol Other:: Other
3821 @end menu
3822
3823 @node Symbol Desc
3824 @subsubsection Descriptor
3825
3826 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
3827 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
3828 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
3829 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
3830 @command{@value{AS}}.
3831
3832 @node Symbol Other
3833 @subsubsection Other
3834
3835 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
3836 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
3837 @end ifset
3838
3839 @ifset COFF
3840 @node COFF Symbols
3841 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
3842
3843 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
3844 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
3845
3846 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
3847 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
3848 @code{.endef} directives.
3849
3850 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
3851
3852 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
3853 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
3854 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
3855
3856 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
3857
3858 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
3859 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
3860 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
3861 table information for COFF.
3862 @end ifset
3863
3864 @ifset SOM
3865 @node SOM Symbols
3866 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
3867
3868 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
3869 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
3870
3871 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
3872 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
3873
3874 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
3875 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
3876 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
3877 @end ifset
3878
3879 @node Expressions
3880 @chapter Expressions
3881
3882 @cindex expressions
3883 @cindex addresses
3884 @cindex numeric values
3885 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
3886 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
3887
3888 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
3889 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
3890 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
3891 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
3892 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
3893 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
3894
3895 @menu
3896 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
3897 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
3898 @end menu
3899
3900 @node Empty Exprs
3901 @section Empty Expressions
3902
3903 @cindex empty expressions
3904 @cindex expressions, empty
3905 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
3906 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
3907 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
3908 is compatible with other assemblers.
3909
3910 @node Integer Exprs
3911 @section Integer Expressions
3912
3913 @cindex integer expressions
3914 @cindex expressions, integer
3915 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
3916 by @emph{operators}.
3917
3918 @menu
3919 * Arguments:: Arguments
3920 * Operators:: Operators
3921 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
3922 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
3923 @end menu
3924
3925 @node Arguments
3926 @subsection Arguments
3927
3928 @cindex expression arguments
3929 @cindex arguments in expressions
3930 @cindex operands in expressions
3931 @cindex arithmetic operands
3932 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
3933 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
3934 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
3935 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
3936 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
3937 instruction operands.
3938
3939 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
3940 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
3941 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
3942 integer.
3943
3944 Numbers are usually integers.
3945
3946 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
3947 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
3948 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
3949 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
3950 assemblers.
3951
3952 @cindex subexpressions
3953 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
3954 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
3955 operator followed by an argument.
3956
3957 @node Operators
3958 @subsection Operators
3959
3960 @cindex operators, in expressions
3961 @cindex arithmetic functions
3962 @cindex functions, in expressions
3963 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
3964 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
3965 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
3966 whitespace.
3967
3968 @node Prefix Ops
3969 @subsection Prefix Operator
3970
3971 @cindex prefix operators
3972 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
3973 one argument, which must be absolute.
3974
3975 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
3976 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
3977 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
3978 @tex
3979 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
3980 @end tex
3981
3982 @table @code
3983 @item -
3984 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
3985 @item ~
3986 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
3987 @end table
3988
3989 @tex
3990 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
3991 @end tex
3992
3993 @node Infix Ops
3994 @subsection Infix Operators
3995
3996 @cindex infix operators
3997 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
3998 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
3999 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
4000 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
4001 absolute, and the result is absolute.
4002
4003 @enumerate
4004 @cindex operator precedence
4005 @cindex precedence of operators
4006
4007 @item
4008 Highest Precedence
4009
4010 @table @code
4011 @item *
4012 @dfn{Multiplication}.
4013
4014 @item /
4015 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
4016
4017 @item %
4018 @dfn{Remainder}.
4019
4020 @item <<
4021 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
4022
4023 @item >>
4024 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
4025 @end table
4026
4027 @item
4028 Intermediate precedence
4029
4030 @table @code
4031 @item |
4032
4033 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
4034
4035 @item &
4036 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
4037
4038 @item ^
4039 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
4040
4041 @item !
4042 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
4043 @end table
4044
4045 @item
4046 Low Precedence
4047
4048 @table @code
4049 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
4050 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
4051 @cindex arguments for addition
4052 @item +
4053 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4054 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
4055 sections.
4056
4057 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4058 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
4059 @cindex arguments for subtraction
4060 @item -
4061 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
4062 result has the section of the left argument.
4063 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4064 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4065 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4066
4067 @cindex comparison expressions
4068 @cindex expressions, comparison
4069 @item ==
4070 @dfn{Is Equal To}
4071 @item <>
4072 @itemx !=
4073 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4074 @item <
4075 @dfn{Is Less Than}
4076 @item >
4077 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
4078 @item >=
4079 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4080 @item <=
4081 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4082
4083 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
4084 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4085 perform signed comparisons.
4086 @end table
4087
4088 @item Lowest Precedence
4089
4090 @table @code
4091 @item &&
4092 @dfn{Logical And}.
4093
4094 @item ||
4095 @dfn{Logical Or}.
4096
4097 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4098 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4099 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4100 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4101
4102 @end table
4103 @end enumerate
4104
4105 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4106 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4107
4108 @node Pseudo Ops
4109 @chapter Assembler Directives
4110
4111 @cindex directives, machine independent
4112 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4113 @cindex machine independent directives
4114 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4115 The rest of the name is letters, usually in lower case.
4116
4117 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4118 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4119 @ifset GENERIC
4120 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4121 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4122 @end ifset
4123 @ifclear GENERIC
4124 @ifset machine-directives
4125 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4126 @end ifset
4127 @end ifclear
4128
4129 @menu
4130 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
4131 @ifset COFF
4132 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4133 @end ifset
4134
4135 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4136 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4137 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4138 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4139 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4140 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, @code{.bundle_lock}, @code{.bundle_unlock}
4141 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4142 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4143 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4144 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4145 @ifset COFF
4146 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4147 @end ifset
4148 @ifset aout-bout
4149 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4150 @end ifset
4151 @ifset COFF
4152 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4153 @end ifset
4154
4155 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4156 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4157 * Else:: @code{.else}
4158 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4159 * End:: @code{.end}
4160 @ifset COFF
4161 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4162 @end ifset
4163
4164 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4165 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4166 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4167 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4168 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4169 * Err:: @code{.err}
4170 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4171 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4172 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4173 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4174 * File:: @code{.file}
4175 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4176 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4177 * Func:: @code{.func}
4178 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4179 @ifset ELF
4180 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4181 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4182 @end ifset
4183
4184 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4185 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4186 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4187 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4188 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4189 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4190 @ifset ELF
4191 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4192 @end ifset
4193
4194 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4195 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4196 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4197 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4198 @ifclear no-line-dir
4199 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4200 @end ifclear
4201
4202 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4203 * List:: @code{.list}
4204 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4205 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4206 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4207 @ifset ELF
4208 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4209 @end ifset
4210
4211 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4212 @ignore
4213 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4214 @end ignore
4215
4216 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4217 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4218 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4219 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4220 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4221 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4222 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4223 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4224 @ifset ELF
4225 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4226 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4227 @end ifset
4228
4229 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4230 @ifset ELF
4231 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4232 @end ifset
4233
4234 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4235 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4236 @ifset ELF
4237 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4238 @end ifset
4239
4240 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4241 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4242 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4243 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4244 @ifset COFF
4245 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4246 @end ifset
4247 @ifset COFF-ELF
4248 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4249 @end ifset
4250
4251 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4252 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4253 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4254 @ifset COFF-ELF
4255 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4256 @end ifset
4257 @ifclear no-space-dir
4258 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4259 @end ifclear
4260
4261 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4262 @ifclear no-space-dir
4263 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4264 @end ifclear
4265 @ifset have-stabs
4266 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4267 @end ifset
4268
4269 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4270 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4271 @ifset ELF
4272 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4273 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4274 @end ifset
4275
4276 @ifset COFF
4277 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4278 @end ifset
4279
4280 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4281 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4282 @ifset COFF-ELF
4283 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4284 @end ifset
4285
4286 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4287 @ifset COFF
4288 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4289 @end ifset
4290
4291 @ifset ELF
4292 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4293 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4294 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4295 @end ifset
4296
4297 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4298 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4299 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4300 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4301 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4302 @end menu
4303
4304 @node Abort
4305 @section @code{.abort}
4306
4307 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4308 @cindex stopping the assembly
4309 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4310 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4311 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4312 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4313 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4314
4315 @ifset COFF
4316 @node ABORT (COFF)
4317 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4318
4319 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4320 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4321 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4322
4323 @ifset BOUT
4324 When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4325 but ignores it.
4326 @end ifset
4327 @end ifset
4328
4329 @node Align
4330 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4331
4332 @cindex padding the location counter
4333 @cindex @code{align} directive
4334 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4335 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4336 required, as described below.
4337
4338 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4339 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4340 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4341 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4342 with no-op instructions.
4343
4344 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4345 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4346 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4347 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4348 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4349 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4350 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4351
4352 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4353 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or32,
4354 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4355 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4356 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4357 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4358 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4359
4360 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4361 strongarm, it is the
4362 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4363 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4364 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4365 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4366
4367 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4368 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4369 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4370 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4371 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4372
4373 @node Altmacro
4374 @section @code{.altmacro}
4375 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4376
4377 @ftable @code
4378 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4379 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4380 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4381 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4382 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4383 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4384 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4385
4386 @item String delimiters
4387 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4388 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4389
4390 @table @code
4391 @item '@var{string}'
4392 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4393
4394 @item <@var{string}>
4395 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4396 @end table
4397
4398 @item single-character string escape
4399 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4400 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4401 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4402 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4403
4404 @item Expression results as strings
4405 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4406 and use the result as a string.
4407 @end ftable
4408
4409 @node Ascii
4410 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4411
4412 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4413 @cindex string literals
4414 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4415 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4416 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4417
4418 @node Asciz
4419 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4420
4421 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4422 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4423 @cindex null-terminated strings
4424 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4425 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4426
4427 @node Balign
4428 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4429
4430 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4431 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4432 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4433 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4434 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4435 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4436 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4437
4438 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4439 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4440 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4441 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4442 with no-op instructions.
4443
4444 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4445 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4446 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4447 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4448 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4449 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4450 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4451
4452 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4453 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4454 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4455 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4456 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4457 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4458 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4459 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4460 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4461 undefined.
4462
4463 @node Bundle directives
4464 @section @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4465 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4466 @cindex bundle
4467 @cindex instruction bundle
4468 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4469 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4470 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4471 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4472 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4473 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4474 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4475
4476 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4477 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4478 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4479 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4480 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4481 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4482 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4483 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4484 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4485 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4486 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4487
4488 @section @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4489 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4490 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4491 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4492 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4493 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4494 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4495 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4496 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4497
4498 @cindex bundle-locked
4499 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4500 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4501 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4502 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4503 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4504 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4505 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4506 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4507 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4508 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4509 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4510 bundle size.
4511
4512 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4513 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4514 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4515 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4516 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4517 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4518
4519 @node Byte
4520 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4521
4522 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4523 @cindex integers, one byte
4524 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4525 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4526
4527 @node CFI directives
4528 @section @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4529 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4530 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4531 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4532 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4533 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4534 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4535 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4536
4537 @section @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4538 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4539 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4540 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4541 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4542 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4543
4544 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4545 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4546
4547 @section @code{.cfi_endproc}
4548 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4549 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4550 unwind entry previously opened by
4551 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4552
4553 @section @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4554 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4555 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4556 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4557 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4558 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4559 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4560 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4561 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4562 no personality routine.
4563
4564 @section @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4565 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4566 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4567 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4568 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be a constant
4569 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4570 no LSDA.
4571
4572 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4573 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4574 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4575
4576 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4577 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4578 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4579 remains the same.
4580
4581 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4582 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4583 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4584 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4585 CFA address.
4586
4587 @section @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4588 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4589 value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
4590
4591 @section @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4592 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4593 CFA.
4594
4595 @section @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4596 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4597 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4598 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4599 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4600 code it's annotating.
4601
4602 @section @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4603 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4604
4605 @section @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4606 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4607 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4608 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4609
4610 @section @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4611 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4612
4613 @section @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4614 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4615 i.e. no restoration needed.
4616
4617 @section @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4618 First save all current rules for all registers by @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4619 then totally screw them up by subsequent @code{.cfi_*} directives and when
4620 everything is hopelessly bad, use @code{.cfi_restore_state} to restore
4621 the previous saved state.
4622
4623 @section @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4624 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4625 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4626
4627 @section @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4628 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4629
4630 @section @code{.cfi_window_save}
4631 SPARC register window has been saved.
4632
4633 @section @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4634 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4635 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4636 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4637
4638 @section @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4639 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4640 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4641 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4642
4643 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4644 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
4645 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4646 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4647 or another register.
4648
4649 @node Comm
4650 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4651
4652 @cindex @code{comm} directive
4653 @cindex symbol, common
4654 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
4655 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4656 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4657 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4658 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
4659 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4660 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4661 using the largest size.
4662
4663 @ifset COFF-ELF
4664 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4665 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4666 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4667 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4668 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4669 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4670 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4671 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
4672 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4673 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4674 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4675 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4676 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
4677 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
4678 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
4679 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
4680 @end ifset
4681
4682 @ifset HPPA
4683 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
4684 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4685 @end ifset
4686
4687 @node Data
4688 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4689
4690 @cindex @code{data} directive
4691 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
4692 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
4693 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
4694 to zero.
4695
4696 @ifset COFF
4697 @node Def
4698 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
4699
4700 @cindex @code{def} directive
4701 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
4702 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
4703 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
4704 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
4705 @ifset BOUT
4706
4707 This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
4708 format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
4709 but ignored.
4710 @end ifset
4711 @end ifset
4712
4713 @ifset aout-bout
4714 @node Desc
4715 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4716
4717 @cindex @code{desc} directive
4718 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
4719 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
4720 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
4721 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
4722
4723 @ifset COFF
4724 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
4725 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
4726 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
4727 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
4728 @end ifset
4729 @end ifset
4730
4731 @ifset COFF
4732 @node Dim
4733 @section @code{.dim}
4734
4735 @cindex @code{dim} directive
4736 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
4737 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
4738 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
4739 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
4740 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
4741 @ifset BOUT
4742
4743 @samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
4744 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
4745 ignores it.
4746 @end ifset
4747 @end ifset
4748
4749 @node Double
4750 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4751
4752 @cindex @code{double} directive
4753 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
4754 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
4755 assembles floating point numbers.
4756 @ifset GENERIC
4757 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4758 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4759 @end ifset
4760 @ifclear GENERIC
4761 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
4762 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
4763 in @sc{ieee} format.
4764 @end ifset
4765 @end ifclear
4766
4767 @node Eject
4768 @section @code{.eject}
4769
4770 @cindex @code{eject} directive
4771 @cindex new page, in listings
4772 @cindex page, in listings
4773 @cindex listing control: new page
4774 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
4775
4776 @node Else
4777 @section @code{.else}
4778
4779 @cindex @code{else} directive
4780 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4781 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
4782 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
4783 was false.
4784
4785 @node Elseif
4786 @section @code{.elseif}
4787
4788 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
4789 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4790 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
4791 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
4792
4793 @node End
4794 @section @code{.end}
4795
4796 @cindex @code{end} directive
4797 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
4798 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
4799
4800 @ifset COFF
4801 @node Endef
4802 @section @code{.endef}
4803
4804 @cindex @code{endef} directive
4805 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
4806 @code{.def}.
4807 @ifset BOUT
4808
4809 @samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
4810 @command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
4811 directive but ignores it.
4812 @end ifset
4813 @end ifset
4814
4815 @node Endfunc
4816 @section @code{.endfunc}
4817 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
4818 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
4819
4820 @node Endif
4821 @section @code{.endif}
4822
4823 @cindex @code{endif} directive
4824 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
4825 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
4826 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
4827
4828 @node Equ
4829 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4830
4831 @cindex @code{equ} directive
4832 @cindex assigning values to symbols
4833 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
4834 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
4835 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
4836
4837 @ifset HPPA
4838 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
4839 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
4840 @end ifset
4841
4842 @ifset Z80
4843 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
4844 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
4845 On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
4846 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
4847 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
4848 @end ifset
4849
4850 @node Equiv
4851 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4852 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
4853 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
4854 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
4855 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
4856 undefined.
4857
4858 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
4859 @smallexample
4860 .ifdef SYM
4861 .err
4862 .endif
4863 .equ SYM,VAL
4864 @end smallexample
4865 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
4866
4867 @node Eqv
4868 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4869 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
4870 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
4871 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
4872 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
4873 value is taken.
4874
4875 @node Err
4876 @section @code{.err}
4877 @cindex @code{err} directive
4878 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
4879 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
4880 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
4881
4882 @node Error
4883 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
4884 @cindex error directive
4885
4886 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
4887 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
4888 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
4889 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
4890
4891 @smallexample
4892 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
4893 @end smallexample
4894
4895 @node Exitm
4896 @section @code{.exitm}
4897 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
4898
4899 @node Extern
4900 @section @code{.extern}
4901
4902 @cindex @code{extern} directive
4903 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
4904 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
4905 all undefined symbols as external.
4906
4907 @node Fail
4908 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
4909
4910 @cindex @code{fail} directive
4911 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
4912 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
4913 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
4914 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
4915 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
4916
4917 @node File
4918 @section @code{.file}
4919 @cindex @code{file} directive
4920
4921 @ifclear no-file-dir
4922 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
4923 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
4924 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
4925
4926 @subheading Default Version
4927
4928 @cindex logical file name
4929 @cindex file name, logical
4930 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
4931 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
4932
4933 @smallexample
4934 .file @var{string}
4935 @end smallexample
4936
4937 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
4938 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
4939 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
4940 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
4941 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
4942
4943 @subheading DWARF2 Version
4944 @end ifclear
4945
4946 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
4947 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
4948
4949 @smallexample
4950 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
4951 @end smallexample
4952
4953 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
4954 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
4955 literal.
4956
4957 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
4958 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
4959 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
4960 entries will have.
4961
4962 @node Fill
4963 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4964
4965 @cindex @code{fill} directive
4966 @cindex writing patterns in memory
4967 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
4968 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
4969 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
4970 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
4971 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
4972 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
4973 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
4974 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
4975 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
4976 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
4977 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
4978 compatible with other people's assemblers.
4979
4980 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
4981 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
4982 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
4983 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
4984
4985 @node Float
4986 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4987
4988 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
4989 @cindex @code{float} directive
4990 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
4991 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
4992 @ifset GENERIC
4993 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4994 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
4995 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4996 @end ifset
4997 @ifclear GENERIC
4998 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
4999 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
5000 in @sc{ieee} format.
5001 @end ifset
5002 @end ifclear
5003
5004 @node Func
5005 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
5006 @cindex @code{func} directive
5007 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
5008 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
5009 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
5010 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
5011 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
5012 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
5013 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
5014 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
5015
5016 @node Global
5017 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
5018
5019 @cindex @code{global} directive
5020 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
5021 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
5022 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
5023 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
5024 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
5025 from another file linked into the same program.
5026
5027 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
5028 compatibility with other assemblers.
5029
5030 @ifset HPPA
5031 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
5032 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
5033 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
5034 @end ifset
5035
5036 @ifset ELF
5037 @node Gnu_attribute
5038 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
5039 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
5040
5041 @node Hidden
5042 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
5043
5044 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
5045 @cindex visibility
5046 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5047 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
5048 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5049
5050 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5051 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5052 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5053 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5054 @end ifset
5055
5056 @node hword
5057 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5058
5059 @cindex @code{hword} directive
5060 @cindex integers, 16-bit
5061 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
5062 @cindex sixteen bit integers
5063 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5064 a 16 bit number for each.
5065
5066 @ifset GENERIC
5067 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5068 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5069 @end ifset
5070 @ifclear GENERIC
5071 @ifset W32
5072 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5073 @end ifset
5074 @ifset W16
5075 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5076 @end ifset
5077 @end ifclear
5078
5079 @node Ident
5080 @section @code{.ident}
5081
5082 @cindex @code{ident} directive
5083
5084 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5085 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5086 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5087 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5088 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5089 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5090 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5091
5092 @node If
5093 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5094
5095 @cindex conditional assembly
5096 @cindex @code{if} directive
5097 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5098 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5099 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5100 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5101 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5102 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5103 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5104 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5105
5106 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5107 @table @code
5108 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5109 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5110 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5111 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5112 is considered to be undefined.
5113
5114 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
5115 @item .ifb @var{text}
5116 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5117
5118 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
5119 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5120 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5121 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5122 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5123 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5124 string comparison is case sensitive.
5125
5126 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5127 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5128 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5129
5130 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5131 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5132 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5133
5134 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5135 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5136 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5137 equal to zero.
5138
5139 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5140 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5141 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5142
5143 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5144 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5145 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5146 to zero.
5147
5148 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5149 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5150 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5151
5152 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5153 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5154 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5155 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5156
5157 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5158 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5159 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5160 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5161
5162 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5163 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5164 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5165 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5166 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5167 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5168 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5169
5170 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5171 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5172 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5173 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5174
5175 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5176 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5177 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5178 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5179 @end table
5180
5181 @node Incbin
5182 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5183
5184 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5185 @cindex binary files, including
5186 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5187 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5188 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5189 around @var{file}.
5190
5191 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5192 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5193 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5194 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5195 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5196
5197 @node Include
5198 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5199
5200 @cindex @code{include} directive
5201 @cindex supporting files, including
5202 @cindex files, including
5203 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5204 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5205 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5206 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5207 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5208 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5209 around @var{file}.
5210
5211 @node Int
5212 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5213
5214 @cindex @code{int} directive
5215 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5216 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5217 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5218 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5219 of target the assembly is for.
5220
5221 @ifclear GENERIC
5222 @ifset H8
5223 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5224 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5225 32-bit integers.
5226 @end ifset
5227 @end ifclear
5228
5229 @ifset ELF
5230 @node Internal
5231 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5232
5233 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5234 @cindex visibility
5235 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5236 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5237 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5238
5239 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5240 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5241 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5242 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5243 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5244 @end ifset
5245
5246 @node Irp
5247 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5248
5249 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5250 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5251 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5252 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5253 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5254 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5255 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5256 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5257
5258 For example, assembling
5259
5260 @example
5261 .irp param,1,2,3
5262 move d\param,sp@@-
5263 .endr
5264 @end example
5265
5266 is equivalent to assembling
5267
5268 @example
5269 move d1,sp@@-
5270 move d2,sp@@-
5271 move d3,sp@@-
5272 @end example
5273
5274 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5275
5276 @node Irpc
5277 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5278
5279 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5280 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5281 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5282 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5283 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5284 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5285 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5286 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5287
5288 For example, assembling
5289
5290 @example
5291 .irpc param,123
5292 move d\param,sp@@-
5293 .endr
5294 @end example
5295
5296 is equivalent to assembling
5297
5298 @example
5299 move d1,sp@@-
5300 move d2,sp@@-
5301 move d3,sp@@-
5302 @end example
5303
5304 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5305 at @xref{Macro}.
5306
5307 @node Lcomm
5308 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5309
5310 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5311 @cindex local common symbols
5312 @cindex symbols, local common
5313 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5314 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5315 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5316 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5317 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5318 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5319
5320 @ifset GENERIC
5321 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5322 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5323 @end ifset
5324
5325 @ifset HPPA
5326 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5327 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5328 @end ifset
5329
5330 @node Lflags
5331 @section @code{.lflags}
5332
5333 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5334 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5335 assemblers, but ignores it.
5336
5337 @ifclear no-line-dir
5338 @node Line
5339 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5340
5341 @cindex @code{line} directive
5342 @cindex logical line number
5343 @ifset aout-bout
5344 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5345 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5346 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5347 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5348 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5349 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5350 @end ifset
5351
5352 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5353 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5354 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5355 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5356 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5357
5358 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5359 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5360 debugging.
5361 @end ifclear
5362
5363 @node Linkonce
5364 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5365 @cindex COMDAT
5366 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5367 @cindex common sections
5368 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5369 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5370 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5371 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5372 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5373 unique.
5374
5375 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5376 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5377 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5378
5379 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5380 following strings. For example:
5381 @smallexample
5382 .linkonce same_size
5383 @end smallexample
5384 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5385
5386 @table @code
5387 @item discard
5388 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5389
5390 @item one_only
5391 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5392
5393 @item same_size
5394 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5395
5396 @item same_contents
5397 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5398 @end table
5399
5400 @node List
5401 @section @code{.list}
5402
5403 @cindex @code{list} directive
5404 @cindex listing control, turning on
5405 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5406 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5407 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5408 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5409 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5410
5411 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5412 @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5413 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5414
5415 @node Ln
5416 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5417
5418 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5419 @ifclear no-line-dir
5420 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5421 @end ifclear
5422 @ifset no-line-dir
5423 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5424 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5425 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5426 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5427 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5428 @ifset BOUT
5429
5430 This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5431 configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5432 output format.
5433 @end ifset
5434 @end ifset
5435
5436 @node Loc
5437 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5438 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5439 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5440 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5441 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5442 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5443 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5444 the row is added.
5445
5446 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5447
5448 @table @code
5449 @item basic_block
5450 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5451 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5452
5453 @item prologue_end
5454 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5455 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5456
5457 @item epilogue_begin
5458 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5459 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5460
5461 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5462 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5463 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5464 either 0 or 1.
5465
5466 @item isa @var{value}
5467 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5468 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5469
5470 @item discriminator @var{value}
5471 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5472 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5473
5474 @end table
5475
5476 @node Loc_mark_labels
5477 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5478 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5479 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5480 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5481 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5482 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5483 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5484 this function respectively.
5485
5486 @ifset ELF
5487 @node Local
5488 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5489
5490 @cindex @code{local} directive
5491 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5492 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5493 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5494 they will be created.
5495
5496 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5497 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5498 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5499 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5500 @end ifset
5501
5502 @node Long
5503 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5504
5505 @cindex @code{long} directive
5506 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5507
5508 @ignore
5509 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5510 @c what it really ought to do
5511 @node Lsym
5512 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5513
5514 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5515 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5516 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5517 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5518 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5519 the same as the expression value:
5520 @smallexample
5521 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5522 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5523 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5524 @end smallexample
5525 @noindent
5526 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5527 @end ignore
5528
5529 @node Macro
5530 @section @code{.macro}
5531
5532 @cindex macros
5533 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5534 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5535 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5536
5537 @example
5538 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5539 .long \from
5540 .if \to-\from
5541 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5542 .endif
5543 .endm
5544 @end example
5545
5546 @noindent
5547 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5548
5549 @example
5550 .long 0
5551 .long 1
5552 .long 2
5553 .long 3
5554 .long 4
5555 .long 5
5556 @end example
5557
5558 @ftable @code
5559 @item .macro @var{macname}
5560 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5561 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5562 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5563 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5564 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5565 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5566 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5567 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5568 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5569 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5570 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5571 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5572
5573 @table @code
5574 @item .macro comm
5575 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5576 arguments.
5577
5578 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
5579 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5580 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5581 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5582 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5583
5584 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5585 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5586 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5587 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5588 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5589 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5590 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5591 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5592
5593 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5594 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5595 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5596 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5597 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5598
5599 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5600 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5601 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5602
5603 @end table
5604
5605 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5606 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5607 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5608 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
5609 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5610 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5611 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5612 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5613 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5614 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
5615 this macro definition:
5616
5617 @example
5618 .macro label l
5619 \l:
5620 .endm
5621 @end example
5622
5623 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5624 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5625 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5626 identifier.
5627
5628 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5629 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
5630 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5631 length specifier like this:
5632
5633 @example
5634 .macro opcode base length
5635 \base.\length
5636 .endm
5637 @end example
5638
5639 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5640 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5641 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5642
5643 There are several possible ways around this problem:
5644
5645 @table @code
5646 @item Insert white space
5647 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5648 solution. eg:
5649
5650 @example
5651 .macro label l
5652 \l :
5653 .endm
5654 @end example
5655
5656 @item Use @samp{\()}
5657 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5658 the following text. eg:
5659
5660 @example
5661 .macro opcode base length
5662 \base\().\length
5663 .endm
5664 @end example
5665
5666 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5667 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5668 used as a separator. eg:
5669
5670 @example
5671 .altmacro
5672 .macro label l
5673 l&:
5674 .endm
5675 @end example
5676 @end table
5677
5678 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
5679 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
5680 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
5681
5682 @item .endm
5683 @cindex @code{endm} directive
5684 Mark the end of a macro definition.
5685
5686 @item .exitm
5687 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
5688 Exit early from the current macro definition.
5689
5690 @cindex number of macros executed
5691 @cindex macros, count executed
5692 @item \@@
5693 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
5694 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
5695 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
5696
5697 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
5698 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
5699 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
5700 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
5701 @end ftable
5702
5703 @node MRI
5704 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
5705
5706 @cindex @code{mri} directive
5707 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
5708 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
5709 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
5710 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
5711 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
5712
5713 @node Noaltmacro
5714 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
5715 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
5716
5717 @node Nolist
5718 @section @code{.nolist}
5719
5720 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
5721 @cindex listing control, turning off
5722 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
5723 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5724 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5725 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5726 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5727
5728 @node Octa
5729 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
5730
5731 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn?
5732 @cindex @code{octa} directive
5733 @cindex integer, 16-byte
5734 @cindex sixteen byte integer
5735 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
5736 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
5737
5738 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5739 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
5740
5741 @node Offset
5742 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
5743
5744 @cindex @code{offset} directive
5745 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
5746 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
5747 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
5748 directive.
5749
5750 @node Org
5751 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
5752
5753 @cindex @code{org} directive
5754 @cindex location counter, advancing
5755 @cindex advancing location counter
5756 @cindex current address, advancing
5757 Advance the location counter of the current section to
5758 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
5759 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
5760 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
5761 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
5762 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
5763 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
5764 is the same as the current subsection.
5765
5766 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
5767 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
5768 backwards.
5769
5770 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
5771 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
5772 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
5773 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
5774 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
5775 a chance to share your improved assembler.
5776
5777 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
5778 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
5779 people's assemblers.
5780
5781 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
5782 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
5783 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
5784 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
5785
5786 @node P2align
5787 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
5788
5789 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
5790 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
5791 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
5792 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
5793 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
5794 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
5795 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
5796 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
5797
5798 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
5799 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
5800 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
5801 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
5802 with no-op instructions.
5803
5804 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
5805 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
5806 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
5807 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
5808 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
5809 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
5810 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
5811
5812 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
5813 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
5814 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
5815 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
5816 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
5817 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
5818 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
5819 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
5820 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
5821 undefined.
5822
5823 @ifset ELF
5824 @node PopSection
5825 @section @code{.popsection}
5826
5827 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
5828 @cindex Section Stack
5829 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5830 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5831 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
5832 (@pxref{Previous}).
5833
5834 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
5835 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
5836 stack.
5837 @end ifset
5838
5839 @ifset ELF
5840 @node Previous
5841 @section @code{.previous}
5842
5843 @cindex @code{previous} directive
5844 @cindex Section Stack
5845 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5846 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5847 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
5848 (@pxref{PopSection}).
5849
5850 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
5851 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
5852 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
5853 subsections). For example:
5854
5855 @smallexample
5856 .section A
5857 .subsection 1
5858 .word 0x1234
5859 .subsection 2
5860 .word 0x5678
5861 .previous
5862 .word 0x9abc
5863 @end smallexample
5864
5865 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
5866 section A. Whilst:
5867
5868 @smallexample
5869 .section A
5870 .subsection 1
5871 # Now in section A subsection 1
5872 .word 0x1234
5873 .section B
5874 .subsection 0
5875 # Now in section B subsection 0
5876 .word 0x5678
5877 .subsection 1
5878 # Now in section B subsection 1
5879 .word 0x9abc
5880 .previous
5881 # Now in section B subsection 0
5882 .word 0xdef0
5883 @end smallexample
5884
5885 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
5886 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
5887
5888 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
5889 the top section on the section stack.
5890 @end ifset
5891
5892 @node Print
5893 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
5894
5895 @cindex @code{print} directive
5896 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
5897 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
5898
5899 @ifset ELF
5900 @node Protected
5901 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
5902
5903 @cindex @code{protected} directive
5904 @cindex visibility
5905 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5906 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
5907
5908 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5909 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5910 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
5911 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
5912 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
5913 this.
5914 @end ifset
5915
5916 @node Psize
5917 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
5918
5919 @cindex @code{psize} directive
5920 @cindex listing control: paper size
5921 @cindex paper size, for listings
5922 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
5923 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
5924
5925 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
5926 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
5927 default width is 200 columns.
5928
5929 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
5930 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
5931 @code{.eject}).
5932
5933 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
5934 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
5935
5936 @node Purgem
5937 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
5938
5939 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
5940 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
5941 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
5942
5943 @ifset ELF
5944 @node PushSection
5945 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
5946
5947 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
5948 @cindex Section Stack
5949 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5950 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5951 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
5952 (@pxref{Previous}).
5953
5954 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
5955 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
5956 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
5957 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
5958 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
5959 @end ifset
5960
5961 @node Quad
5962 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
5963
5964 @cindex @code{quad} directive
5965 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
5966 each bignum, it emits
5967 @ifclear bignum-16
5968 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
5969 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
5970 @cindex eight-byte integer
5971 @cindex integer, 8-byte
5972
5973 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5974 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
5975 @end ifclear
5976 @ifset bignum-16
5977 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
5978 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
5979 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
5980 @cindex integer, 16-byte
5981 @end ifset
5982
5983 @node Reloc
5984 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
5985
5986 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
5987 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
5988 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
5989 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
5990 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
5991 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
5992 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
5993 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
5994 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
5995 section.
5996
5997 @node Rept
5998 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
5999
6000 @cindex @code{rept} directive
6001 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
6002 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
6003
6004 For example, assembling
6005
6006 @example
6007 .rept 3
6008 .long 0
6009 .endr
6010 @end example
6011
6012 is equivalent to assembling
6013
6014 @example
6015 .long 0
6016 .long 0
6017 .long 0
6018 @end example
6019
6020 @node Sbttl
6021 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
6022
6023 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
6024 @cindex subtitles for listings
6025 @cindex listing control: subtitle
6026 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
6027 title line) when generating assembly listings.
6028
6029 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6030 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6031
6032 @ifset COFF
6033 @node Scl
6034 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
6035
6036 @cindex @code{scl} directive
6037 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
6038 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
6039 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
6040 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
6041 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
6042 symbolic debugging information.
6043 @ifset BOUT
6044
6045 The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
6046 configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
6047 accepts this directive but ignores it.
6048 @end ifset
6049 @end ifset
6050
6051 @ifset COFF-ELF
6052 @node Section
6053 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
6054
6055 @cindex named section
6056 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6057 named @var{name}.
6058
6059 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6060 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6061 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6062
6063 @ifset COFF
6064 @ifset ELF
6065 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6066 @subheading COFF Version
6067 @end ifset
6068
6069 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6070 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6071 ways:
6072
6073 @smallexample
6074 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6075 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6076 @end smallexample
6077
6078 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6079 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6080 @table @code
6081 @item b
6082 bss section (uninitialized data)
6083 @item n
6084 section is not loaded
6085 @item w
6086 writable section
6087 @item d
6088 data section
6089 @item e
6090 exclude section from linking
6091 @item r
6092 read-only section
6093 @item x
6094 executable section
6095 @item s
6096 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6097 @item a
6098 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6099 @item y
6100 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6101 @item 0-9
6102 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6103 @end table
6104
6105 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6106 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6107 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6108 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6109 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6110
6111 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6112 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6113 @end ifset
6114
6115 @ifset ELF
6116 @ifset COFF
6117 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6118 @subheading ELF Version
6119 @end ifset
6120
6121 @cindex Section Stack
6122 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6123 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6124 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6125 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6126
6127 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6128 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6129
6130 @smallexample
6131 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6132 @end smallexample
6133
6134 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6135 combination of the following characters:
6136 @table @code
6137 @item a
6138 section is allocatable
6139 @item e
6140 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6141 @item w
6142 section is writable
6143 @item x
6144 section is executable
6145 @item M
6146 section is mergeable
6147 @item S
6148 section contains zero terminated strings
6149 @item G
6150 section is a member of a section group
6151 @item T
6152 section is used for thread-local-storage
6153 @item ?
6154 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6155 @end table
6156
6157 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6158 @table @code
6159 @item @@progbits
6160 section contains data
6161 @item @@nobits
6162 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6163 @item @@note
6164 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6165 @item @@init_array
6166 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6167 @item @@fini_array
6168 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6169 @item @@preinit_array
6170 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6171 @end table
6172
6173 Many targets only support the first three section types.
6174
6175 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6176 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6177 @code{%} character.
6178
6179 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6180 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6181
6182 @smallexample
6183 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6184 @end smallexample
6185
6186 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6187 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6188 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6189 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6190 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6191 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6192 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6193 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6194 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6195
6196 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6197 be present along with an additional field like this:
6198
6199 @smallexample
6200 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6201 @end smallexample
6202
6203 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6204 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6205 @table @code
6206 @item comdat
6207 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6208 @item .gnu.linkonce
6209 an alias for comdat
6210 @end table
6211
6212 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6213 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6214
6215 @smallexample
6216 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6217 @end smallexample
6218
6219 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6220 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6221 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6222 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6223 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6224 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6225
6226 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6227 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6228 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6229 executable. The section will contain data.
6230
6231 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6232 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6233
6234 @smallexample
6235 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6236 @end smallexample
6237
6238 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6239 separated flags:
6240 @table @code
6241 @item #alloc
6242 section is allocatable
6243 @item #write
6244 section is writable
6245 @item #execinstr
6246 section is executable
6247 @item #exclude
6248 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6249 @item #tls
6250 section is used for thread local storage
6251 @end table
6252
6253 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6254 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6255 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6256 work.
6257 @end ifset
6258 @end ifset
6259
6260 @node Set
6261 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6262
6263 @cindex @code{set} directive
6264 @cindex symbol value, setting
6265 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6266 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6267 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6268 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6269
6270 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly.
6271
6272 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6273 file is the last value stored into it.
6274
6275 @ifset Z80
6276 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6277 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6278 @end ifset
6279
6280 @node Short
6281 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6282
6283 @cindex @code{short} directive
6284 @ifset GENERIC
6285 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6286 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6287
6288 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6289 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6290 @end ifset
6291 @ifclear GENERIC
6292 @ifset W16
6293 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6294 @end ifset
6295 @ifset W32
6296 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6297 a 16 bit number for each.
6298 @end ifset
6299 @end ifclear
6300
6301 @node Single
6302 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6303
6304 @cindex @code{single} directive
6305 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6306 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6307 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6308 @ifset GENERIC
6309 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6310 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6311 @end ifset
6312 @ifclear GENERIC
6313 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6314 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6315 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6316 @end ifset
6317 @end ifclear
6318
6319 @ifset COFF-ELF
6320 @node Size
6321 @section @code{.size}
6322
6323 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6324
6325 @ifset COFF
6326 @ifset ELF
6327 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6328 @subheading COFF Version
6329 @end ifset
6330
6331 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6332 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6333 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6334
6335 @smallexample
6336 .size @var{expression}
6337 @end smallexample
6338
6339 @ifset BOUT
6340 @samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6341 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6342 ignores it.
6343 @end ifset
6344 @end ifset
6345
6346 @ifset ELF
6347 @ifset COFF
6348 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6349 @subheading ELF Version
6350 @end ifset
6351
6352 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6353 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6354
6355 @smallexample
6356 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6357 @end smallexample
6358
6359 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6360 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6361 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6362 symbols.
6363 @end ifset
6364 @end ifset
6365
6366 @ifclear no-space-dir
6367 @node Skip
6368 @section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6369
6370 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6371 @cindex filling memory
6372 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6373 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6374 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6375 @samp{.space}.
6376 @end ifclear
6377
6378 @node Sleb128
6379 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6380
6381 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6382 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6383 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6384 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6385
6386 @ifclear no-space-dir
6387 @node Space
6388 @section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6389
6390 @cindex @code{space} directive
6391 @cindex filling memory
6392 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6393 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6394 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6395 as @samp{.skip}.
6396
6397 @ifset HPPA
6398 @quotation
6399 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6400 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6401 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6402 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6403 for a summary.
6404 @end quotation
6405 @end ifset
6406 @end ifclear
6407
6408 @ifset have-stabs
6409 @node Stab
6410 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6411
6412 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6413 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6414 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6415 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6416 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6417 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6418 Up to five fields are required:
6419
6420 @table @var
6421 @item string
6422 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6423 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6424 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6425 using this field.
6426
6427 @item type
6428 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6429 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6430 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6431
6432 @item other
6433 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6434 low 8 bits of this expression.
6435
6436 @item desc
6437 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6438 bits of this expression.
6439
6440 @item value
6441 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6442 @end table
6443
6444 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6445 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6446 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6447 compatible with earlier assemblers!
6448
6449 @table @code
6450 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
6451 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6452
6453 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6454 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6455 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6456 strings.
6457
6458 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6459 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6460 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6461 assembled.
6462
6463 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
6464 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6465 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6466
6467 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
6468 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6469 All five fields are specified.
6470 @end table
6471 @end ifset
6472 @c end have-stabs
6473
6474 @node String
6475 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6476 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6477
6478 @cindex string, copying to object file
6479 @cindex string8, copying to object file
6480 @cindex string16, copying to object file
6481 @cindex string32, copying to object file
6482 @cindex string64, copying to object file
6483 @cindex @code{string} directive
6484 @cindex @code{string8} directive
6485 @cindex @code{string16} directive
6486 @cindex @code{string32} directive
6487 @cindex @code{string64} directive
6488
6489 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6490 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6491 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6492 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6493
6494 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6495 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6496 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6497 are stored in target endianness byte order.
6498
6499 Example:
6500 @smallexample
6501 .string32 "BYE"
6502 expands to:
6503 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6504 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6505 @end smallexample
6506
6507
6508 @node Struct
6509 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6510
6511 @cindex @code{struct} directive
6512 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6513 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
6514 @smallexample
6515 .struct 0
6516 field1:
6517 .struct field1 + 4
6518 field2:
6519 .struct field2 + 4
6520 field3:
6521 @end smallexample
6522 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6523 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6524 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6525 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6526 before further assembly.
6527
6528 @ifset ELF
6529 @node SubSection
6530 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6531
6532 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
6533 @cindex Section Stack
6534 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6535 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6536 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6537 (@pxref{Previous}).
6538
6539 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
6540 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6541 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6542 @end ifset
6543
6544 @ifset ELF
6545 @node Symver
6546 @section @code{.symver}
6547 @cindex @code{symver} directive
6548 @cindex symbol versioning
6549 @cindex versions of symbols
6550 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6551 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6552 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6553 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6554 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6555 shared library.
6556
6557 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6558 @smallexample
6559 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6560 @end smallexample
6561 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6562 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6563 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6564 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6565 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6566 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
6567 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6568 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6569 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6570 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6571 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6572 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
6573 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6574 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6575
6576 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6577 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
6578 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6579 symbol table.
6580
6581 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6582 @smallexample
6583 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6584 @end smallexample
6585 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6586 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6587 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6588 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6589
6590 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6591 @smallexample
6592 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6593 @end smallexample
6594 When @var{name} is not defined within the
6595 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6596 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6597 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6598 @end ifset
6599
6600 @ifset COFF
6601 @node Tag
6602 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6603
6604 @cindex COFF structure debugging
6605 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
6606 @cindex @code{tag} directive
6607 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6608 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
6609 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
6610 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
6611 @ifset BOUT
6612
6613 @samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
6614 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6615 ignores it.
6616 @end ifset
6617 @end ifset
6618
6619 @node Text
6620 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
6621
6622 @cindex @code{text} directive
6623 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
6624 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
6625 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
6626 is used.
6627
6628 @node Title
6629 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
6630
6631 @cindex @code{title} directive
6632 @cindex listing control: title line
6633 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
6634 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
6635
6636 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6637 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6638
6639 @ifset COFF-ELF
6640 @node Type
6641 @section @code{.type}
6642
6643 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
6644
6645 @ifset COFF
6646 @ifset ELF
6647 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6648 @subheading COFF Version
6649 @end ifset
6650
6651 @cindex COFF symbol type
6652 @cindex symbol type, COFF
6653 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
6654 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
6655 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6656
6657 @smallexample
6658 .type @var{int}
6659 @end smallexample
6660
6661 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
6662 entry.
6663
6664 @ifset BOUT
6665 @samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
6666 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
6667 directive but ignores it.
6668 @end ifset
6669 @end ifset
6670
6671 @ifset ELF
6672 @ifset COFF
6673 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6674 @subheading ELF Version
6675 @end ifset
6676
6677 @cindex ELF symbol type
6678 @cindex symbol type, ELF
6679 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
6680 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
6681
6682 @smallexample
6683 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
6684 @end smallexample
6685
6686 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
6687 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
6688 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
6689 compatibility with various other assemblers.
6690
6691 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
6692 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
6693 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
6694 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
6695 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
6696 assemblers.
6697
6698 The syntaxes supported are:
6699
6700 @smallexample
6701 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
6702 .type <name>,#<type>
6703 .type <name>,@@<type>
6704 .type <name>,%<type>
6705 .type <name>,"<type>"
6706 @end smallexample
6707
6708 The types supported are:
6709
6710 @table @gcctabopt
6711 @item STT_FUNC
6712 @itemx function
6713 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
6714
6715 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
6716 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
6717 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
6718 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
6719
6720 @item STT_OBJECT
6721 @itemx object
6722 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
6723
6724 @item STT_TLS
6725 @itemx tls_object
6726 Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
6727
6728 @item STT_COMMON
6729 @itemx common
6730 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
6731
6732 @item STT_NOTYPE
6733 @itemx notype
6734 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
6735
6736 @item gnu_unique_object
6737 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
6738 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
6739 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
6740 systems).
6741
6742 @end table
6743
6744 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
6745
6746 @end ifset
6747 @end ifset
6748
6749 @node Uleb128
6750 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
6751
6752 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
6753 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
6754 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6755 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
6756
6757 @ifset COFF
6758 @node Val
6759 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
6760
6761 @cindex @code{val} directive
6762 @cindex COFF value attribute
6763 @cindex value attribute, COFF
6764 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
6765 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
6766 entry.
6767 @ifset BOUT
6768
6769 @samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
6770 configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
6771 @end ifset
6772 @end ifset
6773
6774 @ifset ELF
6775 @node Version
6776 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
6777
6778 @cindex @code{version} directive
6779 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
6780 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
6781 @end ifset
6782
6783 @ifset ELF
6784 @node VTableEntry
6785 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
6786
6787 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
6788 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
6789 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
6790
6791 @node VTableInherit
6792 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
6793
6794 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
6795 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
6796 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
6797 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
6798 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
6799 @end ifset
6800
6801 @node Warning
6802 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
6803 @cindex warning directive
6804 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
6805 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
6806
6807 @node Weak
6808 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
6809
6810 @cindex @code{weak} directive
6811 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6812 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6813
6814 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
6815 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6816 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6817
6818 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
6819 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
6820 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
6821
6822 @node Weakref
6823 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
6824
6825 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
6826 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
6827 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
6828 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
6829 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
6830 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
6831
6832 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
6833 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
6834 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
6835 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
6836 had the references to the alias removed.
6837
6838 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
6839 within the assembler.
6840
6841 @node Word
6842 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
6843
6844 @cindex @code{word} directive
6845 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
6846 separated by commas.
6847 @ifclear GENERIC
6848 @ifset W32
6849 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
6850 @end ifset
6851 @ifset W16
6852 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
6853 @end ifset
6854 @end ifclear
6855 @ifset GENERIC
6856
6857 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
6858 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
6859 @end ifset
6860
6861 @c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
6862 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
6863 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6864 @cindex difference tables altered
6865 @cindex altered difference tables
6866 @quotation
6867 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
6868 @end quotation
6869
6870 @ifset GENERIC
6871 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
6872 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
6873 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
6874 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
6875
6876 @end ifset
6877 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
6878 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
6879 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
6880 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
6881 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
6882 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
6883 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
6884 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
6885 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
6886 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
6887 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
6888 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
6889 @code{sym2}.
6890
6891 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
6892 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
6893 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
6894 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
6895 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
6896 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
6897 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
6898
6899 @ifset INTERNALS
6900 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
6901 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
6902 assembly language programmers.
6903 @end ifset
6904 @end ifset
6905 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6906
6907 @node Deprecated
6908 @section Deprecated Directives
6909
6910 @cindex deprecated directives
6911 @cindex obsolescent directives
6912 One day these directives won't work.
6913 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
6914 @table @t
6915 @item .abort
6916 @item .line
6917 @end table
6918
6919 @ifset ELF
6920 @node Object Attributes
6921 @chapter Object Attributes
6922 @cindex object attributes
6923
6924 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
6925 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
6926 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
6927 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
6928 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
6929 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
6930 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
6931 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
6932 newer generation at run-time.
6933
6934 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
6935 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
6936 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
6937 correctly.
6938
6939 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
6940 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
6941 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
6942 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
6943 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
6944 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
6945
6946 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
6947 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
6948
6949 @menu
6950 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
6951 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
6952 @end menu
6953
6954 @node GNU Object Attributes
6955 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
6956
6957 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
6958 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
6959
6960 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
6961 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
6962 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
6963 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
6964 architecture-dependent ones.
6965
6966 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
6967
6968 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
6969
6970 @table @r
6971 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
6972 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
6973 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
6974 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
6975 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
6976 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
6977 @end table
6978
6979 @subsection MIPS Attributes
6980
6981 @table @r
6982 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
6983 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
6984
6985 @itemize @bullet
6986 @item
6987 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
6988 @item
6989 1 for files using the hardware floating-point with a standard double-precision
6990 FPU.
6991 @item
6992 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
6993 @item
6994 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
6995 @item
6996 4 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit wide
6997 double-precision floating-point registers and 32-bit wide general
6998 purpose registers.
6999 @end itemize
7000 @end table
7001
7002 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
7003
7004 @table @r
7005 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
7006 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7007
7008 @itemize @bullet
7009 @item
7010 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7011 @item
7012 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7013 @item
7014 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7015 @item
7016 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7017 @end itemize
7018
7019 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
7020 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7021
7022 @itemize @bullet
7023 @item
7024 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7025 @item
7026 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
7027 @item
7028 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
7029 @item
7030 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
7031 @end itemize
7032 @end table
7033
7034 @node Defining New Object Attributes
7035 @section Defining New Object Attributes
7036
7037 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
7038 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
7039 mailing list.
7040
7041 @itemize @bullet
7042 @item
7043 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
7044 @item
7045 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
7046 @item
7047 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
7048 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
7049 @item
7050 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7051 @item
7052 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7053 @item
7054 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7055 @end itemize
7056
7057 @end ifset
7058
7059 @ifset GENERIC
7060 @node Machine Dependencies
7061 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7062
7063 @cindex machine dependencies
7064 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7065 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
7066 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7067 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7068 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
7069 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7070 optimization.
7071
7072 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7073 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
7074 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7075
7076 @menu
7077 @ifset AARCH64
7078 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7079 @end ifset
7080 @ifset ALPHA
7081 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7082 @end ifset
7083 @ifset ARC
7084 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7085 @end ifset
7086 @ifset ARM
7087 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7088 @end ifset
7089 @ifset AVR
7090 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7091 @end ifset
7092 @ifset Blackfin
7093 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7094 @end ifset
7095 @ifset CR16
7096 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7097 @end ifset
7098 @ifset CRIS
7099 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7100 @end ifset
7101 @ifset D10V
7102 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7103 @end ifset
7104 @ifset D30V
7105 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7106 @end ifset
7107 @ifset EPIPHANY
7108 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7109 @end ifset
7110 @ifset H8/300
7111 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7112 @end ifset
7113 @ifset HPPA
7114 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7115 @end ifset
7116 @ifset I370
7117 * ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
7118 @end ifset
7119 @ifset I80386
7120 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7121 @end ifset
7122 @ifset I860
7123 * i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features
7124 @end ifset
7125 @ifset I960
7126 * i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features
7127 @end ifset
7128 @ifset IA64
7129 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7130 @end ifset
7131 @ifset IP2K
7132 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7133 @end ifset
7134 @ifset LM32
7135 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7136 @end ifset
7137 @ifset M32C
7138 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7139 @end ifset
7140 @ifset M32R
7141 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7142 @end ifset
7143 @ifset M680X0
7144 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7145 @end ifset
7146 @ifset M68HC11
7147 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7148 @end ifset
7149 @ifset METAG
7150 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7151 @end ifset
7152 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7153 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7154 @end ifset
7155 @ifset MIPS
7156 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7157 @end ifset
7158 @ifset MMIX
7159 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7160 @end ifset
7161 @ifset MSP430
7162 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7163 @end ifset
7164 @ifset NDS32
7165 * NDS32-Dependent:: Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
7166 @end ifset
7167 @ifset NIOSII
7168 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7169 @end ifset
7170 @ifset NS32K
7171 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7172 @end ifset
7173 @ifset SH
7174 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7175 * SH64-Dependent:: SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
7176 @end ifset
7177 @ifset PDP11
7178 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7179 @end ifset
7180 @ifset PJ
7181 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7182 @end ifset
7183 @ifset PPC
7184 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7185 @end ifset
7186 @ifset RL78
7187 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7188 @end ifset
7189 @ifset RX
7190 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7191 @end ifset
7192 @ifset S390
7193 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7194 @end ifset
7195 @ifset SCORE
7196 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7197 @end ifset
7198 @ifset SPARC
7199 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7200 @end ifset
7201 @ifset TIC54X
7202 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7203 @end ifset
7204 @ifset TIC6X
7205 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7206 @end ifset
7207 @ifset TILEGX
7208 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7209 @end ifset
7210 @ifset TILEPRO
7211 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7212 @end ifset
7213 @ifset V850
7214 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7215 @end ifset
7216 @ifset XGATE
7217 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Features
7218 @end ifset
7219 @ifset XSTORMY16
7220 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7221 @end ifset
7222 @ifset XTENSA
7223 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7224 @end ifset
7225 @ifset Z80
7226 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7227 @end ifset
7228 @ifset Z8000
7229 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7230 @end ifset
7231 @ifset VAX
7232 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7233 @end ifset
7234 @end menu
7235
7236 @lowersections
7237 @end ifset
7238
7239 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7240 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7241 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7242 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7243 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7244 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7245 @c in both conditional blocks.
7246
7247 @ifset AARCH64
7248 @include c-aarch64.texi
7249 @end ifset
7250
7251 @ifset ALPHA
7252 @include c-alpha.texi
7253 @end ifset
7254
7255 @ifset ARC
7256 @include c-arc.texi
7257 @end ifset
7258
7259 @ifset ARM
7260 @include c-arm.texi
7261 @end ifset
7262
7263 @ifset AVR
7264 @include c-avr.texi
7265 @end ifset
7266
7267 @ifset Blackfin
7268 @include c-bfin.texi
7269 @end ifset
7270
7271 @ifset CR16
7272 @include c-cr16.texi
7273 @end ifset
7274
7275 @ifset CRIS
7276 @include c-cris.texi
7277 @end ifset
7278
7279 @ifset Renesas-all
7280 @ifclear GENERIC
7281 @node Machine Dependencies
7282 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7283
7284 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7285 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7286 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7287 family.
7288
7289 @menu
7290 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7291 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7292 @end menu
7293 @lowersections
7294 @end ifclear
7295 @end ifset
7296
7297 @ifset D10V
7298 @include c-d10v.texi
7299 @end ifset
7300
7301 @ifset D30V
7302 @include c-d30v.texi
7303 @end ifset
7304
7305 @ifset EPIPHANY
7306 @include c-epiphany.texi
7307 @end ifset
7308
7309 @ifset H8/300
7310 @include c-h8300.texi
7311 @end ifset
7312
7313 @ifset HPPA
7314 @include c-hppa.texi
7315 @end ifset
7316
7317 @ifset I370
7318 @include c-i370.texi
7319 @end ifset
7320
7321 @ifset I80386
7322 @include c-i386.texi
7323 @end ifset
7324
7325 @ifset I860
7326 @include c-i860.texi
7327 @end ifset
7328
7329 @ifset I960
7330 @include c-i960.texi
7331 @end ifset
7332
7333 @ifset IA64
7334 @include c-ia64.texi
7335 @end ifset
7336
7337 @ifset IP2K
7338 @include c-ip2k.texi
7339 @end ifset
7340
7341 @ifset LM32
7342 @include c-lm32.texi
7343 @end ifset
7344
7345 @ifset M32C
7346 @include c-m32c.texi
7347 @end ifset
7348
7349 @ifset M32R
7350 @include c-m32r.texi
7351 @end ifset
7352
7353 @ifset M680X0
7354 @include c-m68k.texi
7355 @end ifset
7356
7357 @ifset M68HC11
7358 @include c-m68hc11.texi
7359 @end ifset
7360
7361 @ifset METAG
7362 @include c-metag.texi
7363 @end ifset
7364
7365 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7366 @include c-microblaze.texi
7367 @end ifset
7368
7369 @ifset MIPS
7370 @include c-mips.texi
7371 @end ifset
7372
7373 @ifset MMIX
7374 @include c-mmix.texi
7375 @end ifset
7376
7377 @ifset MSP430
7378 @include c-msp430.texi
7379 @end ifset
7380
7381 @ifset NDS32
7382 @include c-nds32.texi
7383 @end ifset
7384
7385 @ifset NIOSII
7386 @include c-nios2.texi
7387 @end ifset
7388
7389 @ifset NS32K
7390 @include c-ns32k.texi
7391 @end ifset
7392
7393 @ifset PDP11
7394 @include c-pdp11.texi
7395 @end ifset
7396
7397 @ifset PJ
7398 @include c-pj.texi
7399 @end ifset
7400
7401 @ifset PPC
7402 @include c-ppc.texi
7403 @end ifset
7404
7405 @ifset RL78
7406 @include c-rl78.texi
7407 @end ifset
7408
7409 @ifset RX
7410 @include c-rx.texi
7411 @end ifset
7412
7413 @ifset S390
7414 @include c-s390.texi
7415 @end ifset
7416
7417 @ifset SCORE
7418 @include c-score.texi
7419 @end ifset
7420
7421 @ifset SH
7422 @include c-sh.texi
7423 @include c-sh64.texi
7424 @end ifset
7425
7426 @ifset SPARC
7427 @include c-sparc.texi
7428 @end ifset
7429
7430 @ifset TIC54X
7431 @include c-tic54x.texi
7432 @end ifset
7433
7434 @ifset TIC6X
7435 @include c-tic6x.texi
7436 @end ifset
7437
7438 @ifset TILEGX
7439 @include c-tilegx.texi
7440 @end ifset
7441
7442 @ifset TILEPRO
7443 @include c-tilepro.texi
7444 @end ifset
7445
7446 @ifset Z80
7447 @include c-z80.texi
7448 @end ifset
7449
7450 @ifset Z8000
7451 @include c-z8k.texi
7452 @end ifset
7453
7454 @ifset VAX
7455 @include c-vax.texi
7456 @end ifset
7457
7458 @ifset V850
7459 @include c-v850.texi
7460 @end ifset
7461
7462 @ifset XGATE
7463 @include c-xgate.texi
7464 @end ifset
7465
7466 @ifset XSTORMY16
7467 @include c-xstormy16.texi
7468 @end ifset
7469
7470 @ifset XTENSA
7471 @include c-xtensa.texi
7472 @end ifset
7473
7474 @ifset GENERIC
7475 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7476 @raisesections
7477 @end ifset
7478
7479 @node Reporting Bugs
7480 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7481 @cindex bugs in assembler
7482 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7483
7484 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7485
7486 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7487 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7488 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7489 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7490
7491 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7492 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7493
7494 @menu
7495 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7496 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7497 @end menu
7498
7499 @node Bug Criteria
7500 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7501 @cindex bug criteria
7502
7503 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7504
7505 @itemize @bullet
7506 @cindex fatal signal
7507 @cindex assembler crash
7508 @cindex crash of assembler
7509 @item
7510 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7511 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
7512
7513 @cindex error on valid input
7514 @item
7515 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7516
7517 @cindex invalid input
7518 @item
7519 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7520 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7521 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7522
7523 @item
7524 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7525 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7526 @end itemize
7527
7528 @node Bug Reporting
7529 @section How to Report Bugs
7530 @cindex bug reports
7531 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7532
7533 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
7534 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7535 contact that organization first.
7536
7537 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7538 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7539 distribution.
7540
7541 @ifset BUGURL
7542 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
7543 to @value{BUGURL}.
7544 @end ifset
7545
7546 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7547 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7548 fact or leave it out, state it!
7549
7550 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
7551 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
7552 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
7553 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
7554 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
7555 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
7556 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
7557 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7558 and the most helpful.
7559
7560 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
7561 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
7562 that the bug has not been reported previously.
7563
7564 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7565 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7566 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7567 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7568
7569 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7570
7571 @itemize @bullet
7572 @item
7573 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
7574 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
7575
7576 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7577 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
7578
7579 @item
7580 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
7581
7582 @item
7583 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7584 version number.
7585
7586 @item
7587 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
7588 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7589
7590 @item
7591 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
7592 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
7593 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7594
7595 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7596 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7597
7598 @item
7599 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
7600 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
7601 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
7602 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
7603 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
7604 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
7605 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
7606
7607 @item
7608 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7609 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7610
7611 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
7612 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
7613 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
7614 make a mistake.
7615
7616 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
7617 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
7618 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
7619 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
7620 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
7621 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
7622 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
7623 observations.
7624
7625 @item
7626 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
7627 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
7628 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
7629 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
7630 by line number.
7631
7632 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7633 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7634 @end itemize
7635
7636 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7637
7638 @itemize @bullet
7639 @item
7640 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7641
7642 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7643 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7644 changes will not affect it.
7645
7646 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7647 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7648 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7649 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7650
7651 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7652 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7653 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7654 less time, and so on.
7655
7656 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7657 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7658
7659 @item
7660 A patch for the bug.
7661
7662 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7663 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7664 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7665 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7666
7667 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
7668 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
7669 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
7670 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
7671
7672 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7673 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7674 help us to understand.
7675
7676 @item
7677 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7678
7679 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7680 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7681 @end itemize
7682
7683 @node Acknowledgements
7684 @chapter Acknowledgements
7685
7686 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
7687 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
7688 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
7689 @c (October 2012),
7690 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
7691
7692 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
7693 more details?}
7694
7695 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
7696 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
7697 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
7698
7699 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
7700 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
7701 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
7702 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
7703 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
7704 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
7705 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
7706 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
7707 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
7708 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
7709
7710 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
7711 in format-specific I/O modules.
7712
7713 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
7714 has done much work with it since.
7715
7716 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
7717
7718 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
7719
7720 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
7721 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
7722
7723 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
7724 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
7725 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
7726 support a.out format.
7727
7728 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
7729 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
7730 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
7731 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
7732 targets.
7733
7734 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
7735 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
7736 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
7737 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
7738 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
7739 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
7740 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
7741
7742 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
7743 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
7744 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
7745 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
7746
7747 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
7748
7749 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
7750
7751 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
7752 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
7753 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
7754 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
7755
7756 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
7757 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
7758 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
7759 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
7760 and some initial 64-bit support).
7761
7762 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
7763
7764 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
7765 support for openVMS/Alpha.
7766
7767 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
7768 flavors.
7769
7770 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
7771 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
7772
7773 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
7774 configuration enhancements.
7775
7776 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
7777
7778 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
7779 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
7780 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
7781 intentionally leaving anyone out.
7782
7783 @node GNU Free Documentation License
7784 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7785 @include fdl.texi
7786
7787 @node AS Index
7788 @unnumbered AS Index
7789
7790 @printindex cp
7791
7792 @bye
7793 @c Local Variables:
7794 @c fill-column: 79
7795 @c End:
This page took 0.200307 seconds and 3 git commands to generate.